new package glossaries, replaces glossary (16may07)

git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@4305 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751

24 files changed, 7594 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/README b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/README
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..6ec00e14365
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/README
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+LaTeX Package : glossaries v 1.0
+
+Last Modified : 16 May 2007
+
+Author        : Nicola Talbot
+
+This package is provided to assist generating glossaries.
+The package supports acronyms and multiple glossaries.
+New entries are defined to have a name and description (and
+optionally an associated symbol.) Plural forms can also be
+specified.  New glossary styles can be defined, and preambles
+and postambles can be specified. There is provision for loading
+a database of terms, only terms used in the text will be added
+to the relevant glossary.
+
+*This package replaces the glossary package which is now obsolete.*
+
+The package is supplied using the TeX Directory Structure (TDS).
+Files in texmf directory should go in the corresponding
+$LOCALTEXMF directories. Files in texmf/bin should go in the
+relevant binary directory, which should be somewhere on your
+operating system's PATH.
+
+*Remember to refresh TeX's database*
+
+This package comes with a LaTeX2HTML style file glossaries.perl.
+This is located in latex2html/styles and should be placed in
+the relevant LaTeX2HTML styles directory, but note that 
+glossaries.perl only supplies a sub-set of the commands provided
+by glossary.sty, so some commands may not be implemented, or
+may be implemented in a different way.
+
+The package and documentation source code is also supplied as a
+dtx and ins file located in texmf/source.
+
+This material is subject to the LaTeX Project Public License. 
+See  http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/licenses.lppl.html for the details of that license.
+
+http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/database1.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/database1.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8a78ad6d785
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/database1.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+% This is a sample database of glossary entries
+% Only those entries used in the document with \glslink, \gls,
+% \glspl, and uppercase variants will have entries in the
+% glossary. Note that the type key is not used, as the
+% glossary type can be specified in \loadglsentries
+
+\newglossaryentry{array}{name=array,
+description={A list of values identified by a numeric value}}
+
+\newglossaryentry{binary}{name=binary,
+description={Pertaining to numbers represented in base 2}}
+
+\newglossaryentry{comment}{name=comment,
+description={A remark that doesn't affect the meaning of the 
+code}}
+
+\newglossaryentry{global}{name=global,
+description={Something that maintains its state when it leaves
+the current group}}
+
+\newglossaryentry{local}{name=local,
+description={Something that only maintains its state until
+it leaves the group in which it was defined/changed}}
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/database2.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/database2.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..032b2d2b586
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/database2.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+% This is a sample database of glossary entries
+% Only those entries used in the document with \glslink, \gls,
+% \glspl, and uppercase variants will have entries in the
+% glossary. Note that the type key is not used, as the
+% glossary type can be specified in \loadglsentries
+
+% Don't need to worry about makeindex special characters
+\newglossaryentry{quote}{name={"},
+description={the double quote symbol}}
+
+\newglossaryentry{at}{name={@},
+description={the ``at'' symbol}}
+
+\newglossaryentry{excl}{name={!},
+description={the exclamation mark symbol}}
+
+\newglossaryentry{bar}{name={$|$},
+description={the vertical bar symbol}}
+
+\newglossaryentry{hash}{name={\#},
+description={the hash symbol}}
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/glossaries.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/glossaries.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3660f84f9c5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/glossaries.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sample.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sample.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..516cb248421
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sample.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+\documentclass[a4paper]{report}
+
+\usepackage[plainpages=false,colorlinks]{hyperref}
+\usepackage[style=altlist]{glossaries}
+
+\makeglossaries
+
+\newglossaryentry{glossary}{name=glossary,
+description={1) list of technical words, 2) collection of 
+glosses},
+plural={glossaries}}
+
+\newglossaryentry{Perl}{name=\texttt{Perl},
+sort=Perl, % need a sort key because name contains a command
+description=A scripting language}
+
+\newglossaryentry{pagelist}{name=page list,
+% description value has to be enclosed in braces
+% because it contains commas
+description={a list of individual pages or page ranges 
+(e.g.\ 1,2,4,7-9)}}
+
+\newglossaryentry{mtrx}{name=matrix,
+description={rectangular array of quantities},
+% plural is not simply obtained by appending an s, so specify
+plural=matrices}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\title{Sample Document Using glossary Package}
+\author{Nicola Talbot}
+\pagenumbering{alph}% prevent duplicate page link names if using PDF
+\maketitle
+
+\pagenumbering{roman}
+\tableofcontents
+
+\chapter{Introduction}
+\pagenumbering{arabic}
+
+A \gls{glossary} is a very useful addition to any
+technical document, although a \gls{glossary} can 
+also simply be a collection of glosses, which is
+another thing entirely. Some documents have
+multiple \glspl{glossary}.
+
+Once you have run your document through \LaTeX, you
+will then need to run the \texttt{.glo} file through
+\texttt{makeindex}.  You will need to set the output
+file so that it creates a \texttt{.gls} file instead
+of an \texttt{.ind} file, and change the name of 
+the log file so that it doesn't overwrite the index
+log file (if you have an index for your document).  
+Rather than having to remember all the command line
+switches, you can call the \gls{Perl} script
+\texttt{makeglossaries} which provides a convenient
+wrapper.
+
+If a comma appears within the name or description, grouping
+must be used, e.g.\ in the description of \gls{pagelist}.
+
+Plurals are assumed to have the letter s appended, but if
+this is not the case, as in \glspl{mtrx}, then you need
+to specify the plural when you define the entry.
+
+\printglossaries
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sample4col.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sample4col.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..67b78bc4575
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sample4col.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+
+\usepackage[style=long4colheader]{glossaries}
+
+\makeglossaries
+
+\newglossaryentry{w}{name={$w$},
+sort=w,
+description={width},
+symbol=m}
+
+\newglossaryentry{M}{name={$M$},
+sort=M,
+description={mass},
+symbol={kg}}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\printglossaries
+
+The width, \gls{w}, is measured in meters. The mass, \gls{M} is
+measured in kilograms.
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleAcr.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleAcr.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..02531ff49a0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleAcr.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+\documentclass[a4paper]{report}
+
+\usepackage[colorlinks,plainpages=false]{hyperref}
+\usepackage[style=long,toc]{glossaries}
+
+\makeglossaries
+
+\newacronym{svm}% label
+{svm}% abbreviation
+{support vector machine}% long form
+
+\newacronym{ksvm}{ksvm}{kernel support vector machine}
+
+\newacronym{rna}{rna}{ribonukleins\"aure}
+
+\begin{document}
+\tableofcontents
+
+\chapter{Support Vector Machines}
+
+\Glspl{svm} are used widely in the area of pattern recognition.
+
+This is the text produced without a link: \glsentrytext{svm}.
+This is the text produced on first use without a link:
+\glsentryfirst{svm}. This is the entry's description without
+a link: \glsentrydesc{svm}.
+
+This is the entry in uppercase: \GLS{svm}.
+
+\chapter{Kernel Support Vector Machines}
+
+The \gls{ksvm} is \ifglsused{svm}{an}{a} \gls{svm} that uses
+the so called ``kernel trick''. Plural: \glspl{ksvm}.
+
+\glsresetall
+Possessive: \gls{ksvm}['s].
+Make the glossary entry number bold for this 
+one \gls[format=hyperbf]{svm}.
+
+\chapter{Another chapter}
+
+You don't need to worry about makeindex's special characters:
+\gls{rna}.
+
+\printglossary[title={Acronyms}]
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleAcrDesc.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleAcrDesc.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4a54c674943
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleAcrDesc.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+\documentclass[a4paper]{report}
+
+\usepackage[colorlinks,plainpages=false]{hyperref}
+
+\usepackage[style=altlist, % use altlist style
+            toc, % add the glossary to the table of contents
+            sanitize={description=false}% don't sanitize description
+           ]{glossaries}
+
+\makeglossaries
+
+\newglossaryentry{svm}{
+% how the entry name should appear in the glossary
+name={Support vector machine (SVM)},
+% how the description should appear in the glossary
+% since I have used sanitize={description=false}
+% I have to protect fragile commands
+description={Statistical pattern recognition
+technique~\protect\cite{svm}},
+% how the entry should appear in the document text
+text={svm},
+% how the entry should appear the first time it is
+% used in the document text
+first={support vector machine (svm)}}
+
+\newglossaryentry{ksvm}{
+name={Kernel support vector machine (KSVM)},
+description={Statistical pattern recognition technique
+using the ``kernel trick'' (see also SVM)},
+text={ksvm},
+first={kernel support vector machine}}
+
+\begin{document}
+\tableofcontents
+
+\chapter{Support Vector Machines}
+
+The \gls{svm} is used widely in the area of pattern recognition.
+% plural form with initial letter in uppercase:
+\Glspl{svm} are \ldots
+
+This is the text produced without a link: \glsentrytext{svm}.
+This is the text produced on first use without a link:
+\glsentryfirst{svm}. This is the entry's description without
+a link: \glsentrydesc{svm}.
+
+This is the entry in uppercase: \GLS{svm}.
+
+\chapter{Kernel Support Vector Machines}
+
+The \gls{ksvm} is \ifglsused{svm}{an}{a} \gls{svm} that uses
+the so called ``kernel trick''.
+
+\glsresetall
+Possessive: \gls{ksvm}['s].
+Make the glossary entry number bold for this 
+one \gls[format=hyperbf]{svm}.
+
+\begin{thebibliography}{1}
+\bibitem{svm} \ldots
+\end{thebibliography}
+
+\printglossary[title={Acronyms}]
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleDB.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleDB.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..7d58e32e2af
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleDB.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+\documentclass{article}
+
+\usepackage[colorlinks,plainpages=false]{hyperref}
+\usepackage[nonumberlist]{glossaries}
+
+\newglossary[nlg]{symbols}{not}{ntn}{Symbols}
+
+\makeglossaries
+
+\loadglsentries{database1}
+\loadglsentries[symbols]{database2}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+Adding all entries\glsaddall.
+
+\printglossaries
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleEq.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleEq.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4fb888c6cb9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleEq.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,231 @@
+\documentclass[a4paper,12pt]{report}
+
+\usepackage{amsmath}
+\usepackage[colorlinks]{hyperref}
+\usepackage[style=long3colheader,counter=equation]{glossaries}
+
+\newcommand{\erf}{\operatorname{erf}}
+\newcommand{\erfc}{\operatorname{erfc}}
+
+\makeglossaries
+
+% Change the glossary headings
+
+\renewcommand{\entryname}{Notation}
+\renewcommand{\descriptionname}{Function Name}
+\renewcommand{\pagelistname}{Number of Formula}
+
+% define glossary entries
+
+\newglossaryentry{Gamma}{name=\ensuremath{\Gamma(z)},
+description=Gamma function,
+sort=Gamma}
+
+\newglossaryentry{gamma}{name={\ensuremath{\gamma(\alpha,x)}},
+description=Incomplete gamma function,
+sort=gamma}
+
+\newglossaryentry{iGamma}{name={\ensuremath{\Gamma(\alpha,x)}},
+description=Incomplete gamma function,
+sort=Gamma}
+
+\newglossaryentry{psi}{name=\ensuremath{\psi(x)},
+description=Psi function,sort=psi}
+
+\newglossaryentry{erf}{name=\ensuremath{\erf(x)},
+description=Error function,sort=erf}
+
+\newglossaryentry{erfc}{name=\ensuremath{\erfc},
+description=Complementary error function,sort=erfc}
+
+\newglossaryentry{B}{name={\ensuremath{B(x,y)}},
+description=Beta function,sort=B}
+
+\newglossaryentry{Bx}{name={\ensuremath{B_x(p,q)}},
+description=Incomplete beta function,sort=Bx}
+
+\newglossaryentry{Tn}{name=\ensuremath{T_n(x)},
+description=Chebyshev's polynomials of the first kind,sort=Tn}
+
+\newglossaryentry{Un}{name=\ensuremath{U_n(x)},
+description=Chebyshev's polynomials of the second kind,sort=Un}
+
+\newglossaryentry{Hn}{name=\ensuremath{H_n(x)},
+description=Hermite polynomials,sort=Hn}
+
+\newglossaryentry{Ln}{name=\ensuremath{L_n^\alpha(x)},
+description=Laguerre polynomials,sort=Lna}
+
+\newglossaryentry{Znu}{name=\ensuremath{Z_\nu(z)},
+description=Bessel functions,sort=Z}
+
+\newglossaryentry{Phi}{name={\ensuremath{\Phi(\alpha,\gamma;z)}},
+description=confluent hypergeometric function,sort=Pagz}
+
+\newglossaryentry{knu}{name=\ensuremath{k_\nu(x)},
+description=Bateman's function,sort=kv}
+
+\newglossaryentry{Dp}{name=\ensuremath{D_p(z)},
+description=Parabolic cylinder functions,sort=Dp}
+
+\newglossaryentry{F}{name={\ensuremath{F(\phi,k)}},
+description=Elliptical integral of the first kind,sort=Fpk}
+
+\newglossaryentry{C}{name=\ensuremath{C},
+description=Euler's constant,sort=C}
+
+\newglossaryentry{G}{name=\ensuremath{G},
+description=Catalan's constant,sort=G}
+
+\begin{document}
+\title{A Sample Document Using glossary.sty}
+\author{Nicola Talbot}
+\maketitle
+
+\begin{abstract}
+This is a sample document illustrating the use of the \textsf{glossaries}
+package.  The functions here have been taken from ``Tables of
+Integrals, Series, and Products'' by I.S.~Gradshteyn and I.M~Ryzhik.
+The glossary is a list of special functions, so 
+the equation number has been used rather than the page number.  This 
+can be done using the \texttt{counter=equation} package
+option.
+\end{abstract}
+
+\printglossary[title={Index of Special Functions and Notations}]
+
+\chapter{Gamma Functions}
+
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{Gamma} = \int_{0}^{\infty}e^{-t}t^{z-1}\,dt
+\end{equation}
+
+\verb|\ensuremath| is only required here if using 
+hyperlinks.
+\begin{equation}
+\glslink{Gamma}{\ensuremath{\Gamma(x+1)}} = x\Gamma(x)
+\end{equation}
+
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{gamma} = \int_0^x e^{-t}t^{\alpha-1}\,dt
+\end{equation}
+
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{iGamma} = \int_x^\infty e^{-t}t^{\alpha-1}\,dt
+\end{equation}
+
+\newpage
+
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{Gamma} = \Gamma(\alpha, x) + \gamma(\alpha, x)
+\end{equation}
+
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{psi} = \frac{d}{dx}\ln\Gamma(x)
+\end{equation}
+
+\chapter{Error Functions}
+
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{erf} = \frac{2}{\surd\pi}\int_0^x e^{-t^2}\,dt
+\end{equation}
+
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{erfc} = 1 - \erf(x)
+\end{equation}
+
+\chapter{Beta Function}
+
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{B} = 2\int_0^1 t^{x-1}(1-t^2)^{y-1}\,dt
+\end{equation}
+Alternatively:
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{B} = 2\int_0^{\frac\pi2}\sin^{2x-1}\phi\cos^{2y-1}\phi\,d\phi
+\end{equation}
+
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{B} = \frac{\Gamma(x)\Gamma(y)}{\Gamma(x+y)} = B(y,x)
+\end{equation}
+
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{Bx} = \int_0^x t^{p-1}(1-t)^{q-1}\,dt
+\end{equation}
+
+\chapter{Polynomials}
+
+\section{Chebyshev's polynomials}
+
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{Tn} = \cos(n\arccos x)
+\end{equation}
+
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{Un} = \frac{\sin[(n+1)\arccos x]}{\sin[\arccos x]}
+\end{equation}
+
+\section{Hermite polynomials}
+
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{Hn} = (-1)^n e^{x^2} \frac{d^n}{dx^n}(e^{-x^2})
+\end{equation}
+
+\section{Laguerre polynomials}
+
+\begin{equation}
+L_n^{\alpha} (x) = \frac{1}{n!}e^x x^{-\alpha} 
+\frac{d^n}{dx^n}(e^{-x}x^{n+\alpha})
+\end{equation}
+
+\chapter{Bessel Functions}
+
+Bessel functions $Z_\nu$ are solutions of
+\begin{equation}
+\frac{d^2\glslink{Znu}{Z_\nu}}{dz^2} 
++ \frac{1}{z}\,\frac{dZ_\nu}{dz} + 
+\left( 1-\frac{\nu^2}{z^2}Z_\nu = 0 \right)
+\end{equation}
+
+\chapter{Confluent hypergeometric function}
+
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{Phi} = 1 + \frac{\alpha}{\gamma}\,\frac{z}{1!}
++ \frac{\alpha(\alpha+1)}{\gamma(\gamma+1)}\,\frac{z^2}{2!}
++\frac{\alpha(\alpha+1)(\alpha+2)}{\gamma(\gamma+1)(\gamma+2)}\,
+\frac{z^3}{3!} + \cdots
+\end{equation}
+
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{knu} = \frac{2}{\pi}\int_0^{\pi/2}
+\cos(x \tan\theta - \nu\theta)\,d\theta
+\end{equation}
+
+\chapter{Parabolic cylinder functions}
+
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{Dp} = 2^{\frac{p}{2}}e^{-\frac{z^2}{4}}
+\left\{
+\frac{\surd\pi}{\Gamma\left(\frac{1-p}{2}\right)}
+\Phi\left(-\frac{p}{2},\frac{1}{2};\frac{z^2}{2}\right)
+-\frac{\sqrt{2\pi}z}{\Gamma\left(-\frac{p}{2}\right)}
+\Phi\left(\frac{1-p}{2},\frac{3}{2};\frac{z^2}{2}\right)
+\right\}
+\end{equation}
+
+\chapter{Elliptical Integral of the First Kind}
+
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{F} = \int_0^\phi \frac{d\alpha}{\sqrt{1-k^2\sin^2\alpha}}
+\end{equation}
+
+\chapter{Constants}
+
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{C} = 0.577\,215\,664\,901\ldots
+\end{equation}
+
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{G} = 0.915\,965\,594\ldots
+\end{equation}
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleEqPg.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleEqPg.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..19531e3897e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleEqPg.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,267 @@
+\documentclass[a4paper,12pt]{report}
+
+\usepackage{amsmath}
+\usepackage[colorlinks]{hyperref}
+\usepackage[style=long3colheader,toc,
+            counter=equation]{glossaries}
+
+\newcommand{\erf}{\operatorname{erf}}
+\newcommand{\erfc}{\operatorname{erfc}}
+
+\renewcommand{\glossaryname}{Index of Special Functions and Notations}
+
+\renewcommand{\glossarypreamble}{Numbers in italic indicate the equation number,
+numbers in bold indicate page numbers where the main definition occurs.\par}
+
+% set the glossary number style to italic
+% hyperit is used instead of textit because
+% the hyperref package is being used.
+\renewcommand{\glsnumberformat}[1]{\hyperit{#1}}
+
+% 1st column heading
+\renewcommand{\entryname}{Notation}
+
+% 2nd column heading
+\renewcommand{\descriptionname}{Function Name}
+
+% 3rd column heading
+\renewcommand{\pagelistname}{}
+
+% Redefine header row so that it
+% adds a blank row after the title row
+\renewcommand{\glossaryheader}{\bfseries\entryname &
+\bfseries\descriptionname&\bfseries\pagelistname\\
+& & \\\endhead}
+
+% Define glossary entries
+
+\newglossaryentry{Gamma}{name=\ensuremath{\Gamma(z)},
+description=Gamma function,sort=Gamma}
+
+\newglossaryentry{gamma}{name=\ensuremath{\gamma(\alpha,x)},
+description=Incomplete gamma function,sort=gamma}
+
+\newglossaryentry{iGamma}{name=\ensuremath{\Gamma(\alpha,x)},
+description=Incomplete gamma function,sort=Gamma}
+
+\newglossaryentry{psi}{name=\ensuremath{\psi(x)},
+description=Psi function,sort=psi}
+
+\newglossaryentry{erf}{name=\ensuremath{\erf(x)},
+description=Error function,sort=erf}
+
+\newglossaryentry{erfc}{name=\ensuremath{\erfc(x)},
+description=Complementary error function,sort=erfc}
+
+\newglossaryentry{beta}{name=\ensuremath{B(x,y)},
+description=Beta function,sort=B}
+
+\newglossaryentry{Bx}{name=\ensuremath{B_x(p,q)},
+description=Incomplete beta function,sort=Bx}
+
+\newglossaryentry{Tn}{name=\ensuremath{T_n(x)},
+description=Chebyshev's polynomials of the first kind,
+sort=Tn}
+
+\newglossaryentry{Un}{name=\ensuremath{U_n(x)},
+description=Chebyshev's polynomials of the second kind,
+sort=Un}
+
+\newglossaryentry{Hn}{name=\ensuremath{H_n(x)},
+description=Hermite polynomials,sort=Hn}
+
+\newglossaryentry{Lna}{name=\ensuremath{L_n^\alpha(x)},
+description=Laguerre polynomials,sort=Lna}
+
+\newglossaryentry{Znu}{name=\ensuremath{Z_\nu(z)},
+description=Bessel functions,sort=Z}
+
+\newglossaryentry{Pagz}{name=\ensuremath{\Phi(\alpha,\gamma;z)},
+description=confluent hypergeometric function,sort=Pagz}
+
+\newglossaryentry{kv}{name=\ensuremath{k_\nu(x)},
+description=Bateman's function,sort=kv}
+
+\newglossaryentry{Dp}{name=\ensuremath{D_p(z)},
+description=Parabolic cylinder functions,sort=Dp}
+
+\newglossaryentry{Fpk}{name=\ensuremath{F(\phi,k)},
+description=Elliptical integral of the first kind,sort=Fpk}
+
+\newglossaryentry{C}{name=\ensuremath{C},
+description=Euler's constant,sort=C}
+
+\newglossaryentry{G}{name=\ensuremath{G},
+description=Catalan's constant,sort=G}
+
+\makeglossaries
+
+\pagestyle{headings}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\title{Sample Document Using Interchangable Numbering}
+\author{Nicola Talbot}
+\maketitle
+
+\begin{abstract}
+This is a sample document illustrating the use of the \textsf{glossaries}
+package.  The functions here have been taken from ``Tables of
+Integrals, Series, and Products'' by I.S.~Gradshteyn and I.M~Ryzhik.
+
+The glossary lists both page numbers and equation numbers.  
+Since the majority of the entries use the equation number,
+\texttt{counter=equation} was used as a package option.
+Note that this example will only work where the
+page number and equation number compositor is the same. So 
+it won't work if, say, the page numbers are of the form 
+2-4 and the equation numbers are of the form 4.6.  
+As most of the glossary entries should have an italic 
+format, it is easiest to set the default format to 
+italic.
+
+\end{abstract}
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\printglossary[toctitle={Special Functions}]
+
+\chapter{Gamma Functions}
+
+The \glslink[format=hyperbf,counter=page]{Gamma}{gamma function} is 
+defined as
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{Gamma} = \int_{0}^{\infty}e^{-t}t^{z-1}\,dt
+\end{equation}
+
+\begin{equation}
+\glslink{Gamma}{\ensuremath{\Gamma(x+1)}} = x\Gamma(x)
+\end{equation}
+
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{gamma} = \int_0^x e^{-t}t^{\alpha-1}\,dt
+\end{equation}
+
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{iGamma} = \int_x^\infty e^{-t}t^{\alpha-1}\,dt
+\end{equation}
+
+\newpage
+
+\begin{equation}
+\glslink{Gamma}{\ensuremath{\Gamma(\alpha)}} = 
+\Gamma(\alpha, x) + \gamma(\alpha, x)
+\end{equation}
+
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{psi} = \frac{d}{dx}\ln\Gamma(x)
+\end{equation}
+
+\chapter{Error Functions}
+
+The \glslink[format=hyperbf,counter=page]{erf}{error function} is defined as:
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{erf} = \frac{2}{\surd\pi}\int_0^x e^{-t^2}\,dt
+\end{equation}
+
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{erfc} = 1 - \erf(x)
+\end{equation}
+
+\chapter{Beta Function}
+
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{beta} = 2\int_0^1 t^{x-1}(1-t^2)^{y-1}\,dt
+\end{equation}
+Alternatively:
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{beta} = 2\int_0^{\frac\pi2}\sin^{2x-1}\phi\cos^{2y-1}\phi\,d\phi
+\end{equation}
+
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{beta} = \frac{\Gamma(x)\Gamma(y)}{\Gamma(x+y)} = B(y,x)
+\end{equation}
+
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{Bx} = \int_0^x t^{p-1}(1-t)^{q-1}\,dt
+\end{equation}
+
+\chapter{Chebyshev's polynomials}
+
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{Tn} = \cos(n\arccos x)
+\end{equation}
+
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{Un} = \frac{\sin[(n+1)\arccos x]}{\sin[\arccos x]}
+\end{equation}
+
+\chapter{Hermite polynomials}
+
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{Hn} = (-1)^n e^{x^2} \frac{d^n}{dx^n}(e^{-x^2})
+\end{equation}
+
+\chapter{Laguerre polynomials}
+
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{Lna} = \frac{1}{n!}e^x x^{-\alpha} 
+\frac{d^n}{dx^n}(e^{-x}x^{n+\alpha})
+\end{equation}
+
+\chapter{Bessel Functions}
+
+Bessel functions $Z_\nu(z)$ are solutions of
+\begin{equation}
+\frac{d^2\glslink{Znu}{Z_\nu}}{dz^2} + \frac{1}{z}\,\frac{dZ_\nu}{dz} + 
+\left(
+1-\frac{\nu^2}{z^2}Z_\nu = 0
+\right)
+\end{equation}
+
+\chapter{Confluent hypergeometric function}
+
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{Pagz} = 1 + \frac{\alpha}{\gamma}\,\frac{z}{1!}
++ \frac{\alpha(\alpha+1)}{\gamma(\gamma+1)}\,\frac{z^2}{2!}
++\frac{\alpha(\alpha+1)(\alpha+2)}
+      {\gamma(\gamma+1)(\gamma+2)}
+\,\frac{z^3}{3!}
++ \cdots
+\end{equation}
+
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{kv} = \frac{2}{\pi}\int_0^{\pi/2}
+\cos(x \tan\theta - \nu\theta)\,d\theta
+\end{equation}
+
+\chapter{Parabolic cylinder functions}
+
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{Dp} = 2^{\frac{p}{2}}e^{-\frac{z^2}{4}}
+\left\{
+\frac{\surd\pi}{\Gamma\left(\frac{1-p}{2}\right)}
+\Phi\left(-\frac{p}{2},\frac{1}{2};\frac{z^2}{2}\right)
+-\frac{\sqrt{2\pi}z}{\Gamma\left(-\frac{p}{2}\right)}
+\Phi\left(\frac{1-p}{2},\frac{3}{2};\frac{z^2}{2}\right)
+\right\}
+\end{equation}
+
+\chapter{Elliptical Integral of the First Kind}
+
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{Fpk} = \int_0^\phi 
+\frac{d\alpha}{\sqrt{1-k^2\sin^2\alpha}}
+\end{equation}
+
+\chapter{Constants}
+
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{C} = 0.577\,215\,664\,901\ldots
+\end{equation}
+
+\begin{equation}
+\gls{G} = 0.915\,965\,594\ldots
+\end{equation}
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleNtn.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleNtn.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..04af87e3562
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleNtn.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+\documentclass{report}
+
+\usepackage[plainpages=false,colorlinks]{hyperref}
+\usepackage{html}
+\usepackage[toc]{glossaries}
+
+% Define a new glossary type called notation
+\newglossary[nlg]{notation}{not}{ntn}{Notation}
+
+\makeglossaries
+
+% Notation definitions
+
+\newglossaryentry{not:set}{type=notation, % glossary type
+name={$\mathcal{S}$},
+description={A set},
+sort={S}}
+
+\newglossaryentry{not:U}{type=notation,
+name={$\mathcal{U}$},
+description={The universal set},
+sort=U}
+
+\newglossaryentry{not:card}{type=notation,
+name={$|\mathcal{S}|$},
+description={cardinality of $\mathcal{S}$},
+sort=cardinality}
+
+\newglossaryentry{not:fact}{type=notation,
+name={$!$},
+description={factorial},
+sort=factorial}
+
+% Main glossary definitions
+
+\newglossaryentry{gls:set}{name=set,
+description={A collection of distinct objects}}
+
+\newglossaryentry{gls:card}{name=cardinality,
+description={The number of elements in the specified set}}
+
+\begin{document}
+\title{Sample Document using glossary Package}
+\author{Nicola Talbot}
+\pagenumbering{alph}
+\maketitle
+
+\begin{abstract}
+%stop hyperref complaining about duplicate page identifiers:
+\pagenumbering{Alph}
+This is a sample document illustrating the use of the
+\textsf{glossaries} package.  In this example, a new glossary type
+called \texttt{notation} is defined, so that the document can have a 
+separate glossary of terms and index of notation. The index of notation
+doesn't have associated numbers.
+\end{abstract}
+
+
+\pagenumbering{roman}
+\tableofcontents
+
+\printglossaries
+
+\chapter{Introduction}
+\pagenumbering{arabic}
+
+\glslink{gls:set}{Sets} 
+are denoted by a caligraphic font 
+e.g.\ \gls{not:set}.
+
+Let \gls[format=hyperit]{not:U} denote the universal set.
+
+The \gls{gls:card} of a set $\mathcal{S}$ is denoted 
+\gls{not:card}.
+
+\chapter{Another Chapter}
+
+Another mention of the universal set \gls{not:U}.
+
+The factorial symbol: \gls{not:fact}.
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleSec.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleSec.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ccefe8c19e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleSec.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+\documentclass{report}
+
+\usepackage[plainpages=false,colorlinks]{hyperref}
+\usepackage[style=altlist,toc,counter=section]{glossaries}
+
+\makeglossaries
+
+\newglossaryentry{ident}{name=identity matrix,
+description=diagonal matrix with 1s along the leading diagonal,
+plural=identity matrices}
+
+\newglossaryentry{diag}{name=diagonal matrix,
+description=matrix whose only non-zero entries are along
+the leading diagonal,
+plural=diagonal matrices}
+
+\newglossaryentry{sing}{name=singular matrix,
+description=matrix with zero determinant,
+plural=singular matrices}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\pagenumbering{roman}
+\tableofcontents
+
+\printglossaries
+
+\chapter{Introduction}
+\pagenumbering{arabic}
+This is a sample document illustrating the use of the
+\textsf{glossaries} package.
+
+\chapter{Diagonal matrices}
+
+A \gls[format=hyperit]{diag} is a matrix where all elements not on the
+leading diagonal are zero.  This is the
+primary definition, so an italic font is used for the page number.
+
+\newpage
+\section{Identity matrix}
+The \gls[format=hyperit]{ident} is a \gls{diag} whose leading
+diagonal elements are all equal to 1.
+
+Here is another entry for a \gls{diag}. And this is the
+plural: \glspl{ident}.
+
+This adds an entry into the glossary with a bold number, but
+it doesn't create a hyperlink: \gls*[format=hyperbf]{ident}.
+
+\chapter{Singular Matrices}
+
+A \gls{sing} is a matrix with zero determinant.
+\Glspl{sing} are non-invertible. Possessive:
+a \gls{sing}['s] dimensions are not necessarily equal.
+
+Another \gls{ident} entry.
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/latex2html/glossaries.perl b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/latex2html/glossaries.perl
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..67f04090aa1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/latex2html/glossaries.perl
@@ -0,0 +1,1689 @@
+# File        : glossaries.perl
+# Author      : Nicola Talbot
+# Date        : 16 May 2007
+# Version     : 1.0
+# Description : LaTeX2HTML (limited!) implementation of glossaries 
+#               package. Note that not all the glossaries.sty
+#               macros have been implemented.
+
+package main;
+
+# These are the only package options implemented.
+
+sub do_glossaries_style_altlist{
+}
+
+sub do_glossaries_toc{
+}
+
+sub do_glossaries_toc_true{
+}
+
+$GLSCURRENTFORMAT="textrm";
+
+sub do_cmd_glossaryname{
+   "Glossary$_[0]"
+}
+
+$gls_mark{'main'} = "<tex2html_gls_main_mark>";
+$gls_file_mark{'main'} = "<tex2html_gls_main_file_mark>";
+$gls_title{'main'} = "\\glossaryname";
+$delimN{'main'} = ", ";
+$glsnumformat{'main'} = $GLSCURRENTFORMAT;
+@{$gls_entries{'main'}} = ();
+$gls_displayfirst{'main'} = "glsdisplayfirst";
+$gls_display{'main'} = "glsdisplay";
+
+%glsentry = ();
+
+$acronymtype = 'main';
+
+sub do_glossaries_acronym{
+   &do_glossaries_acronym_true
+}
+
+sub do_glossaries_acronym_true{
+   &make_newglossarytype("acronym", "\\acronymname");
+   $acronymtype = 'acronym';
+}
+
+sub do_glossary_acronym_false{
+   $acronymtype = 'main';
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_acronymname{
+   join('', 'Acronyms', $_[0]);
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_acronymtype{
+   join('', $acronymtype, $_[0]);
+}
+
+# modify set_depth_levels so that glossary is added
+
+sub replace_glossary_markers{
+   foreach $type (keys %gls_mark)
+   {
+      if (defined &add_gls_hook)
+        {&add_gls_hook if (/$gls_mark{$type}/);}
+      else
+        {&add_gls($type) if (/$gls_mark{$type}/);}
+
+      s/$gls_file_mark{$type}/$glsfile{$type}/g;
+   }
+}
+
+# there must be a better way of doing this
+# other than copying the orginal code and adding to it.
+sub replace_general_markers {
+    if (defined &replace_infopage_hook) {&replace_infopage_hook if (/$info_page_mark/);}
+    else { &replace_infopage if (/$info_page_mark/); }
+    if (defined &add_idx_hook) {&add_idx_hook if (/$idx_mark/);}
+    else {&add_idx if (/$idx_mark/);}
+    &replace_glossary_markers;
+
+    if ($segment_figure_captions) {
+s/$lof_mark/$segment_figure_captions/o
+    } else { s/$lof_mark/$figure_captions/o }
+    if ($segment_table_captions) {
+s/$lot_mark/$segment_table_captions/o
+    } else { s/$lot_mark/$table_captions/o }
+    &replace_morelinks();
+    if (defined &replace_citations_hook) {&replace_citations_hook if /$bbl_mark/;}
+    else {&replace_bbl_marks if /$bbl_mark/;}
+    if (defined &add_toc_hook) {&add_toc_hook if (/$toc_mark/);}
+    else {&add_toc if (/$toc_mark/);}
+    if (defined &add_childs_hook) {&add_childs_hook if (/$childlinks_on_mark/);}
+    else {&add_childlinks if (/$childlinks_on_mark/);}
+    &remove_child_marks;
+
+    if (defined &replace_cross_references_hook) {&replace_cross_references_hook;}
+    else {&replace_cross_ref_marks if /$cross_ref_mark||$cross_ref_visible_mark/;}
+    if (defined &replace_external_references_hook) {&replace_external_references_hook;}
+    else {&replace_external_ref_marks if /$external_ref_mark/;}
+    if (defined &replace_cite_references_hook) {&replace_cite_references_hook;}
+    else { &replace_cite_marks if /$cite_mark/; }
+    if (defined &replace_user_references) {
+  &replace_user_references if /$user_ref_mark/; }
+
+}
+
+sub add_gls{
+    local($sidx_style, $eidx_style) =('<STRONG>','</STRONG>');
+    if ($INDEX_STYLES) {
+if ($INDEX_STYLES =~/,/) {
+local(@styles) = split(/\s*,\s*/,$INDEX_STYLES);
+    $sidx_style = join('','<', join('><',@styles) ,'>');
+    $eidx_style = join('','</', join('></',reverse(@styles)) ,'>');
+} else {
+    $sidx_style = join('','<', $INDEX_STYLES,'>');
+    $eidx_style = join('','</', $INDEX_STYLES,'>');
+}
+    }
+    &add_real_gls
+}
+
+sub gloskeysort{
+   local($x, $y) = ($a, $b);
+   $x=~s/^(.*)###(\d+)$/\l\1/;
+   local($x_id) = $2;
+   $y=~s/^(.*)###(\d+)$/\l\1/;
+   local($y_id) = $2;
+
+   local($n) = ($x cmp $y);
+
+   if ($n == 0)
+   {
+      $n = ($x_id <=> $y_id);
+   }
+
+   $n;
+}
+
+sub add_real_gls{
+   local($type) = @_;
+   print "\nDoing glossary '$type' ...";
+   local($key, $str, @keys, $glossary, $level, $count,
+   @previous, @current, $id, $linktext, $delimN);
+
+   @keys = keys %{$glossary{$type}};
+
+   @keys = sort gloskeysort @keys;
+
+   $level = 0;
+
+   $delimN = $delimN{$type};
+
+   foreach $key (@keys)
+   {
+      $current = $key;
+      $str = $current;
+      $str =~ s/\#\#\#\d+$//o; # Remove the unique id's
+      #$linktext = $cross_ref_visible_mark;
+      $id = ++$global{'max_id'};
+      $linktext = "\\$glossary_format{$type}{$key}${OP}$id${CP}$glossary_linktext{$type}{$key}${OP}$id${CP}";
+      $linktext = &translate_commands($linktext);
+
+      local($entry) = $glossary_entry{$type}{$key};
+
+      $id = ++$global{'max_id'};
+      local($name) = &translate_commands(
+         "\\glsnamefont $OP$id$CP$glsentry{$entry}{name}$OP$id$CP");
+
+      local($symbol) = ($glsentry{$entry}{'symbol'} ?
+                     " $glsentry{$entry}{symbol}" : '');
+
+      $glossary .=
+      # If it's the same string don't start a new line
+         (&index_key_eq($current, $previous) ?
+               $delimN
+               . $glossary{$type}{$key}
+               . $linktext
+               . "</A>\n"
+            : "<DT>"
+                   . $name
+                   . "<DD>"
+                   . $glsentry{$entry}{'description'} 
+                   . $symbol . '. '
+                   . $glossary{$type}{$key}
+         . $linktext. "</A>\n");
+      $previous = $current;
+   }
+    $glossary = '<DD>'.$glossary unless ($glossary =~ /^\s*<D(T|D)>/);
+
+    $glossary =~ s/(<A [^>]*>)(<D(T|D)>)/$2$1/g;
+
+    $str = &translate_commands("\\glossarypostamble");
+    s/$gls_mark{$type}/$preglossary\n<DL COMPACT>\n$glossary<\/DL>$str\n/s;
+}
+
+sub set_depth_levels {
+    # Sets $outermost_level
+    local($level);
+    # scan the document body, not the preamble, for use of sectioning commands
+    my ($contents) = $_;
+    if ($contents =~ /\\begin\s*((?:$O|$OP)\d+(?:$C|$CP))document\1|\\startdocument/s) {
+$contents = $';
+    }
+    foreach $level ("part", "chapter", "section", "subsection",
+    "subsubsection", "paragraph") {
+last if (($outermost_level) = $contents =~ /\\($level)$delimiter_rx/);
+last if (($outermost_level) = $contents =~ /\\endsegment\s*\[\s*($level)\s*\]/s);
+if ($contents =~ /\\segment\s*($O\d+$C)[^<]+\1\s*($O\d+$C)\s*($level)\s*\2/s)
+{ $outermost_level = $3; last };
+    }
+    $level = ($outermost_level ? $section_commands{$outermost_level} :
+      do {$outermost_level = 'section'; 3;});
+
+    if ($REL_DEPTH && $MAX_SPLIT_DEPTH) {
+$MAX_SPLIT_DEPTH = $level + $MAX_SPLIT_DEPTH;
+    } elsif (!($MAX_SPLIT_DEPTH)) { $MAX_SPLIT_DEPTH = 1 };
+
+    %unnumbered_section_commands = (
+          'tableofcontents', $level
+, 'listoffigures', $level
+, 'listoftables', $level
+, 'bibliography', $level
+, 'textohtmlindex', $level
+, 'textohtmlglossary', $level
+, 'textohtmlglossaries', $level
+        , %unnumbered_section_commands
+        );
+
+    %section_commands = (
+  %unnumbered_section_commands
+        , %section_commands
+        );
+}
+
+sub add_bbl_and_idx_dummy_commands {
+    local($id) = $global{'max_id'};
+
+    s/([\\]begin\s*$O\d+$C\s*thebibliography)/$bbl_cnt++; $1/eg;
+    ## if ($bbl_cnt == 1) {
+s/([\\]begin\s*$O\d+$C\s*thebibliography)/$id++; "\\bibliography$O$id$C$O$id$C $1"/geo;
+    #}
+    $global{'max_id'} = $id;
+    s/([\\]begin\s*$O\d+$C\s*theindex)/\\textohtmlindex $1/o;
+    s/[\\]printindex/\\textohtmlindex /o;
+    &add_gls_dummy_commands;
+    &lib_add_bbl_and_idx_dummy_commands() if defined(&lib_add_bbl_and_idx_dummy_commands);
+}
+
+sub add_gls_dummy_commands{
+   s/[\\]printglossary/\\textohtmlglossary/sg;
+   s/[\\]printglossaries/\\textohtmlglossaries/sg;
+}
+
+sub get_firstkeyval{
+   local($key,$_) = @_;
+   local($value);
+
+   s/\b$key\s*=$OP(\d+)$CP(.*)$OP\1$CP\s*(,|$)/$value=$2;','/es;
+   undef($value) if $`=~/\b$key\s*=/;
+
+   unless (defined($value))
+   {
+      s/(^|,)\s*$key\s*=\s*([^,]*)\s*(,|$)/,/s;
+      $value=$2;
+   }
+
+   ($value,$_);
+}
+
+# need to get the value of the last key of a given name
+# in the event of multiple occurences.
+sub get_keyval{
+   local($key,$_) = @_;
+   local($value);
+
+   while (/\b$key\s*=/)
+   {
+      ($value,$_) = &get_firstkeyval($key, $_);
+   }
+
+   ($value,$_);
+}
+
+# This is modified from do_cmd_textohtmlindex
+
+sub do_cmd_textohtmlglossary{
+   local($_) = @_;
+
+   local($keyval,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument;
+
+   local($type,$title,$toctitle,$style);
+
+   ($type,$keyval) = &get_keyval('type', $keyval);
+   ($title,$keyval) = &get_keyval('title', $keyval);
+   ($toctitle,$keyval) = &get_keyval('toctitle', $keyval);
+   ($style,$keyval) = &get_keyval('style', $keyval);
+
+   &make_textohtmlglossary($type,$toctitle,$title,$style).$_;
+}
+
+sub make_textohtmlglossary{
+   local($type,$toctitle,$title,$style) = @_;
+
+   unless (defined($type)) {$type = 'main';}
+
+   unless (defined $gls_mark{$type})
+   {
+      &write_warnings("glossary type '$type' not implemented");
+   }
+
+   unless (defined($title) and $title) {$title = $gls_title{$type};}
+   unless (defined($toctitle) and $toctitle) {$toctitle = $title;}
+
+   $toc_sec_title = $toctitle;
+   $glsfile{$type} = $CURRENT_FILE;
+
+   $TITLE=&translate_commands($toctitle);
+
+   if (%glossary_labels) { &make_glossary_labels(); }
+
+   if (($SHORT_INDEX) && (%glossary_segment))
+   {
+      &make_preglossary();
+   }
+   else
+   {
+      $preglossary = &translate_commands("\\glossarypreamble");
+   }
+
+   local $idx_head = $section_headings{'textohtmlindex'};
+   local($heading) = join(''
+        , &make_section_heading($title, $idx_head)
+        , $gls_mark{$type} );
+   local($pre,$post) = &minimize_open_tags($heading);
+   join('',"<BR>\n" , $pre);
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_textohtmlglossaries{
+   local($_) = @_;
+
+   foreach $type (keys %gls_mark)
+   {
+      $id = ++$global{'max_id'};
+      $_ = &make_textohtmlglossary($type,$gls_title{'main'}).$_;
+   }
+
+   $_;
+}
+
+sub make_glossary_labels {
+    local($key, @keys);
+    @keys = keys %glossary_labels;
+    foreach $key (@keys) {
+        if (($ref_files{$key}) && !($ref_files{$key} eq "$glsfile{'main'}")) {
+            local($tmp) = $ref_files{$key};
+            &write_warnings("\nmultiple label $key , target in $glsfile{'main'} masks $tmp ");
+        }
+        $ref_files{$key} .= $glsfile{'main'};
+    }
+}
+
+sub make_preglossary{ &make_real_preglossary }
+sub make_real_preglossary{
+    local($key, @keys, $head, $body);
+    $head = "<HR>\n<H4>Legend:</H4>\n<DL COMPACT>";
+    @keys = keys %glossary_segment;
+    foreach $key (@keys) {
+        local($tmp) = "segment$key";
+        $tmp = $ref_files{$tmp};
+        $body .= "\n<DT>$key<DD>".&make_named_href('',$tmp,$glossary_segment{$key});
+    }
+    $preglossary = join('', $head, $body, "\n</DL>") if ($body);
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_glossary { &do_real_glossary(@_) }
+sub do_real_glossary {
+   local($_) = @_;
+   local($type) = "main";
+   local($anchor,$entry);
+
+   local($type,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument;
+
+   $entry = &missing_braces unless 
+           (s/$next_pair_pr_rx//o&&($entry=$2));
+
+   $anchor = &make_glossary_entry($entry,$anchor_invisible_mark,$type);
+
+   join('', $anchor, $_);
+}
+
+sub make_glossary_entry { &make_real_glossary_entry(@_) }
+sub make_real_glossary_entry {
+    local($entry,$text,$type) = @_;
+    local($this_file) = $CURRENT_FILE;
+    $TITLE = $saved_title if (($saved_title)&&(!($TITLE)||($TITLE eq $default_title)));
+
+    local($sort) = $glsentry{$entry}{'sort'};
+
+    # Save the reference
+    local($str) = "$sort###" . ++$global{'max_id'}; # Make unique
+    # concatenate multiple spaces into a single space
+    # otherwise keys won't sort properly
+    $str=~s/\s+/ /gs;
+    local($br_id) = ++$global{'max_id'};
+    $glossary{$type}{$str} .= &make_half_href($this_file."#$br_id");
+    $glossary_format{$type}{$str} = $GLSCURRENTFORMAT;
+    $glossary_entry{$type}{$str} = $entry;
+    $glossary_linktext{$type}{$str} = $TITLE;
+    "<A HREF=$gls_file_mark{$type}#tex2html$href_name NAME=\"$br_id\">$text<\/A>";
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_newglossary{
+   local($_) = @_;
+   local($type,$out,$in,$opt,$pat,$title);
+
+   ($opt,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument;
+
+   $type = &missing_braces unless 
+           (s/$next_pair_pr_rx//o&&($type=$2));
+   $in = &missing_braces unless 
+           (s/$next_pair_pr_rx//o&&($in=$2));
+   $out = &missing_braces unless 
+           (s/$next_pair_pr_rx//o&&($out=$2));
+   $title = &missing_braces unless 
+           (s/$next_pair_pr_rx//o&&($title=$2));
+
+   ($opt,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument;
+
+   &make_newglossarytype($type, $title);
+
+   $_;
+}
+
+sub make_newglossarytype{
+   local($type, $title) = @_;
+
+   $gls_mark{$type} = "<tex2html_gls_${type}_mark>";
+   $gls_file_mark{$type} = "<tex2html_gls_${type}_file_mark>";
+   $gls_title{$type} = $title;
+   $delimN{$type} = ", ";
+   $glsnumformat{$type} = $GLSCURRENTFORMAT;
+   @{$gls_entries{$type}} = ();
+   $gls_displayfirst{$type} = "glsdisplayfirst";
+   $gls_display{$type} = "glsdisplay";
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_glsdisplay{
+   local($_) = @_;
+   local($text,$description,$symbol,$insert);
+
+   $text = &missing_braces unless
+        (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$text=$2;''/eo);
+
+   $description = &missing_braces unless
+        (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$description=$2;''/eo);
+
+   $symbol = &missing_braces unless
+        (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$symbol=$2;''/eo);
+
+   $insert = &missing_braces unless
+        (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$insert=$2;''/eo);
+
+   "$text$insert" . $_;
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_glsdisplayfirst{
+   local($_) = @_;
+   local($text,$description,$symbol,$insert);
+
+   $text = &missing_braces unless
+        (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$text=$2;''/eo);
+
+   $description = &missing_braces unless
+        (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$description=$2;''/eo);
+
+   $symbol = &missing_braces unless
+        (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$symbol=$2;''/eo);
+
+   $insert = &missing_braces unless
+        (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$insert=$2;''/eo);
+
+   "$text$insert" . $_;
+}
+
+sub gls_get_displayfirst{
+   local($type) = @_;
+   local($display)= $gls_displayfirst{$type};
+
+   if (not defined($display))
+   {
+      &write_warnings("Glossary '$type' is not defined");
+      $display='';
+   }
+   elsif ($display eq '')
+   {
+      &write_warnings("glsdisplayfirst not set for glossary '$type'");
+   }
+   else
+   {
+      $display = "\\$display ";
+   }
+
+   $display;
+}
+
+sub gls_get_display{
+   local($type) = @_;
+   local($display)= $gls_display{$type};
+
+   if (not defined($display))
+   {
+      &write_warnings("Glossary '$type' is not defined");
+      $display = '';
+   }
+   elsif ($display eq '')
+   {
+      &write_warnings("glsdisplay not set for glossary '$type'");
+   }
+   else
+   {
+      $display = "\\$display ";
+   }
+
+   $display;
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_glsnamefont{
+   local($_) = @_;
+   local($text);
+
+   $text = &missing_braces unless
+        (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$text=$2;''/eo);
+
+   "<B>$text</B>$_";
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_newacronym{
+   local($_) = @_;
+   local($label,$abbrev,$long,$opt);
+
+   ($opt,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument;
+
+   $label = &missing_braces unless
+        (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo);
+   $abbrv = &missing_braces unless
+        (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$abbrv=$2;''/eo);
+   $long = &missing_braces unless
+        (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$long=$2;''/eo);
+
+   local($cmd) = "\\newglossaryentry";
+   local($id);
+   $id = ++$global{'max_id'};
+   $cmd .= "$OP$id$CP$label$OP$id$CP";
+   $id = ++$global{'max_id'};
+   local($entry) = "type=$OP$id$CP\\acronymtype$OP$id$CP,";
+   $id = ++$global{'max_id'};
+   $entry .= "name=$OP$id$CP$abbrv$OP$id$CP,";
+   $id = ++$global{'max_id'};
+   $entry .= "description=$OP$id$CP$long$OP$id$CP,";
+   $id = ++$global{'max_id'};
+   $entry .= "text=$OP$id$CP$abbrv$OP$id$CP,";
+   $id = ++$global{'max_id'};
+   $entry .= "first=$OP$id$CP$long ($abbrv)$OP$id$CP,";
+   $id = ++$global{'max_id'};
+   $entry .= "plural=$OP$id$CP${abbrv}s$OP$id$CP,";
+   $id = ++$global{'max_id'};
+   $entry .= "firstplural=$OP$id$CP${long}s (${abbrv}s)$OP$id$CP";
+
+   $id = ++$global{'max_id'};
+   $cmd .= "$OP$id$CP$entry,$opt$OP$id$CP";
+
+   &translate_commands($cmd).$_;
+}
+
+sub gls_entry_init{
+   local($label, $type, $name, $desc) = @_;
+
+   %{$glsentry{$label}} = 
+     ( type => $type,
+       name => $name,
+       'sort' => $name,
+       description => $description,
+       text => $name,
+       first => $name,
+       plural => "${name}s",
+       firstplural => "${name}s",
+       symbol => '',
+       flag => 0
+     );
+}
+
+sub gls_get_type{
+   local($label) = @_;
+   local($type) = '';
+
+   if (&gls_entry_defined($label))
+   {
+      $type = $glsentry{$label}{'type'};
+   }
+   else
+   {
+      &write_warnings("gls_get_type: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined");
+   }
+
+   $type;
+}
+
+sub gls_set_type{
+   local($label, $type) = @_;
+
+   if (&gls_entry_defined($label))
+   {
+      $glsentry{$label}{'type'} = $type;
+   }
+   else
+   {
+      &write_warnings("gls_set_type: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined");
+   }
+}
+
+sub gls_get_name{
+   local($label) = @_;
+   local($name) = '';
+
+   if (&gls_entry_defined($label))
+   {
+      $name = $glsentry{$label}{'name'};
+   }
+   else
+   {
+      &write_warnings("gls_get_name: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined");
+   }
+
+   $name;
+}
+
+sub gls_set_name{
+   local($label, $name) = @_;
+
+   if (&gls_entry_defined($label))
+   {
+      $glsentry{$label}{'name'} = $name;
+   }
+   else
+   {
+      &write_warnings("gls_set_name: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined");
+   }
+}
+
+sub gls_get_description{
+   local($label) = @_;
+   local($description) = '';
+
+   if (&gls_entry_defined($label))
+   {
+      $description = $glsentry{$label}{'description'};
+   }
+   else
+   {
+      &write_warnings("gls_get_description: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined");
+   }
+
+   $description;
+}
+
+sub gls_set_description{
+   local($label, $description) = @_;
+
+   if (&gls_entry_defined($label))
+   {
+      $glsentry{$label}{'description'} = $description;
+   }
+   else
+   {
+      &write_warnings("gls_set_description: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined");
+   }
+}
+
+sub gls_get_symbol{
+   local($label) = @_;
+   local($symbol) = '';
+
+   if (&gls_entry_defined($label))
+   {
+      $symbol = $glsentry{$label}{'symbol'};
+   }
+   else
+   {
+      &write_warnings("gls_get_symbol: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined");
+   }
+
+   $symbol;
+}
+
+sub gls_set_symbol{
+   local($label, $symbol) = @_;
+
+   if (&gls_entry_defined($label))
+   {
+      $glsentry{$label}{'symbol'} = $symbol;
+   }
+   else
+   {
+      &write_warnings("gls_set_symbol: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined");
+   }
+}
+
+sub gls_get_sort{
+   local($label) = @_;
+   local($sort) = '';
+
+   if (&gls_entry_defined($label))
+   {
+      $sort = $glsentry{$label}{'sort'};
+   }
+   else
+   {
+      &write_warnings("gls_get_sort: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined");
+   }
+
+   $sort;
+}
+
+sub gls_set_sort{
+   local($label, $sort) = @_;
+
+   if (&gls_entry_defined($label))
+   {
+      $glsentry{$label}{'sort'} = $sort;
+   }
+   else
+   {
+      &write_warnings("gls_set_sort: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined");
+   }
+}
+
+sub gls_get_text{
+   local($label) = @_;
+   local($text) = '';
+
+   if (&gls_entry_defined($label))
+   {
+      $text = $glsentry{$label}{'text'};
+   }
+   else
+   {
+      &write_warnings("gls_get_text: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined");
+   }
+
+   $text;
+}
+
+sub gls_set_text{
+   local($label, $text) = @_;
+
+   if (&gls_entry_defined($label))
+   {
+      $glsentry{$label}{'text'} = $text;
+   }
+   else
+   {
+      &write_warnings("gls_set_text: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined");
+   }
+}
+
+sub gls_get_plural{
+   local($label) = @_;
+   local($plural) = '';
+
+   if (&gls_entry_defined($label))
+   {
+      $plural = $glsentry{$label}{'plural'};
+   }
+   else
+   {
+      &write_warnings("gls_get_plural: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined");
+   }
+
+   $plural;
+}
+
+sub gls_set_plural{
+   local($label, $plural) = @_;
+
+   if (&gls_entry_defined($label))
+   {
+      $glsentry{$label}{'plural'} = $plural;
+   }
+   else
+   {
+      &write_warnings("gls_set_plural: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined");
+   }
+}
+
+sub gls_get_firstplural{
+   local($label) = @_;
+   local($firstplural) = '';
+
+   if (&gls_entry_defined($label))
+   {
+      $firstplural = $glsentry{$label}{'firstplural'};
+   }
+   else
+   {
+      &write_warnings("gls_get_firstplural: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined");
+   }
+
+   $firstplural;
+}
+
+sub gls_set_firstplural{
+   local($label, $firstplural) = @_;
+
+   if (&gls_entry_defined($label))
+   {
+      $glsentry{$label}{'firstplural'} = $firstplural;
+   }
+   else
+   {
+      &write_warnings("gls_set_firstplural: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined");
+   }
+}
+
+sub gls_get_first{
+   local($label) = @_;
+   local($first) = '';
+
+   if (&gls_entry_defined($label))
+   {
+      $first = $glsentry{$label}{'first'};
+   }
+   else
+   {
+      &write_warnings("gls_get_first: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined");
+   }
+
+   $first;
+}
+
+sub gls_set_first{
+   local($label, $first) = @_;
+
+   if (&gls_entry_defined($label))
+   {
+      $glsentry{$label}{'first'} = $first;
+   }
+   else
+   {
+      &write_warnings("gls_set_first: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined");
+   }
+}
+
+sub gls_used{
+   local($label) = @_;
+   local($flag) = 0;
+
+   if (&gls_entry_defined($label))
+   {
+      $flag = $glsentry{$label}{'flag'};
+   }
+   else
+   {
+      &write_warnings("gls_used: glossary entry '$label' has not been defined");
+   }
+
+   $flag;
+}
+
+sub gls_entry_defined{
+   local($label) = @_;
+
+   defined(%{$glsentry{$label}});
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_newglossaryentry{
+   local($_) = @_;
+   local($label,$name,$description,$symbol,$sort,$text,$first,
+     $plural,$firstplural,$type,$keyval);
+
+   $label = &missing_braces unless
+              s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo;
+
+   $keyval = &missing_braces unless
+              s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$keyval=$2;''/eo;
+
+   ($name,$keyval) = &get_keyval('name', $keyval);
+   ($description,$keyval) = &get_keyval('description', $keyval);
+   ($symbol,$keyval) = &get_keyval('symbol', $keyval);
+   ($sort,$keyval) = &get_keyval('sort', $keyval);
+   ($text,$keyval) = &get_keyval('text', $keyval);
+   ($first,$keyval) = &get_keyval('first', $keyval);
+   ($firstplural,$keyval) = &get_keyval('firstplural', $keyval);
+   ($plural,$keyval) = &get_keyval('plural', $keyval);
+   ($type,$keyval) = &get_keyval('type', $keyval);
+
+   if (defined($type))
+   {
+      $type = &translate_commands($type);
+   }
+   else
+   {
+      $type = 'main';
+   }
+
+   &gls_entry_init($label, $type, $name, $description);
+
+   &gls_set_symbol($label, defined($symbol)?$symbol:'');
+
+   $sort = "$name $description" unless (defined($sort) and $sort);
+
+   &gls_set_sort($label, $sort);
+
+   $text = $name unless (defined($text) and $text);
+
+   &gls_set_text($label, $text);
+
+   $first = $text unless (defined($first) and $first);
+
+   &gls_set_first($label, $first);
+
+   $plural = "${text}s" unless (defined($plural) and $plural);
+
+   &gls_set_plural($label, $plural);
+
+   $firstplural = "${first}s" unless (defined($firstplural) and $firstplural);
+
+   &gls_set_firstplural($label, $firstplural);
+
+   push @{$gls_entries{$type}}, $label;
+
+   $_;
+}
+
+sub reset_entry{
+   local($label) = @_;
+
+   $glsentry{$label}{'flag'} = 0;
+}
+
+sub unset_entry{
+   local($label) = @_;
+
+   $glsentry{$label}{'flag'} = 1;
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_glsreset{
+   local($_) = @_;
+   local($label);
+
+   $label = &missing_braces unless
+              s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo;
+
+   &reset_entry($label);
+
+   $_;
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_glsunset{
+   local($_) = @_;
+   local($label);
+
+   $label = &missing_braces unless
+              s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo;
+
+   &unset_entry($label);
+
+   $_;
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_ifglsused{
+   local($_) = @_;
+   local($label,$true,$false);
+
+   $label = &missing_braces unless
+              s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo;
+
+   $true = &missing_braces unless
+              s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$true=$2;''/eo;
+
+   $false = &missing_braces unless
+              s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$false=$2;''/eo;
+
+   (&gls_used($label) ? $true : $false) . $_;
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_ifglsentryexists{
+   local($_) = @_;
+   local($label,$true,$false);
+
+   $label = &missing_braces unless
+              s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo;
+
+   $true = &missing_braces unless
+              s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$true=$2;''/eo;
+
+   $false = &missing_braces unless
+              s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$false=$2;''/eo;
+
+   (&gls_entry_defined($label) ? $true : $false) . $_;
+}
+
+sub gls_add_entry{
+   local($type, $label, $format, $text) = @_;
+
+   local($oldfmt) = $GLSCURRENTFORMAT;
+
+   if (defined($format) and $format)
+   {
+      $GLSCURRENTFORMAT=$format;
+   }
+
+   $id = ++$global{'max_id'};
+
+   local($str) = &make_real_glossary_entry($label,$text,$type);
+   $GLSCURRENTFORMAT = $oldfmt;
+
+   $str;
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_glsadd{
+   local($_) = @_;
+   local($optarg,$pat,$label,$str,$id,$type,$format);
+   ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument;
+
+   $label = &missing_braces unless
+             (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo);
+
+   $type = &gls_get_type($label);
+
+   if (defined $type)
+   {
+      ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg);
+      $format='' unless(defined($format));
+
+      &gls_add_entry($type,$label,$format,"");
+   }
+   else
+   {
+      &write_warnings("gls_add: glossary entry '$label' undefined");
+      $str = '';
+   }
+
+   $str . $_;
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_glsaddall{
+   local($_) = @_;
+   local($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument;
+
+   local($format,$types);
+
+   ($type,$optarg) = &get_keyval('types', $optarg);
+
+   ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg);
+   $format='' unless(defined($format));
+
+   local(@types) = keys(%gls_mark);
+
+   if (defined($types))
+   {
+      @types = split /,/, $types;
+   }
+
+   foreach $type (@types)
+   {
+      # strip leasing and trailing spaces
+      $type=~s/^\s*([^\s]+)\s*$/\1/;
+
+      foreach $label (@{$gls_entries{$type}})
+      {
+         &gls_add_entry($type,$label,$format,"");
+      }
+   }
+
+   $_;
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_glsresetall{
+   local($_) = @_;
+   local($types,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument;
+
+   local(@types) = keys(%gls_mark);
+
+   if (defined($types) and $types)
+   {
+      @types = split /,/, $types;
+   }
+
+   foreach $type (@types)
+   {
+      # strip leasing and trailing spaces
+      $type=~s/^\s*([^\s]+)\s*$/\1/;
+
+      foreach $label (@{$gls_entries{$type}})
+      {
+         &reset_entry($label);
+      }
+   }
+
+   $_;
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_glsunsetall{
+   local($_) = @_;
+   local($types,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument;
+
+   local(@types) = keys(%gls_mark);
+
+   if (defined($types) and $types)
+   {
+      @types = split /,/, $types;
+   }
+
+   foreach $type (@types)
+   {
+      # strip leasing and trailing spaces
+      $type=~s/^\s*([^\s]+)\s*$/\1/;
+
+      foreach $label (@{$gls_entries{$type}})
+      {
+         &reset_entry($label);
+      }
+   }
+
+   $_;
+}
+
+sub make_glslink{
+   local($type,$label,$format,$text) = @_;
+   local($str) = '';
+
+   if (defined $type)
+   {
+      $str = &gls_add_entry($type,$label,$format,$text);
+   }
+   else
+   {
+      &write_warnings("glossary '$type' undefined");
+   }
+
+   $str;
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_glslink{
+   local($_) = @_;
+   local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text,$type,$format,$str);
+
+   ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument;
+
+   ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg);
+
+   $label = &missing_braces unless
+             (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo);
+
+   $text = &missing_braces unless
+             (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$text=$2;''/eo);
+
+   local ($space) = '';
+   if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';}
+   ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument;
+
+   $type = &gls_get_type($label);
+
+   &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, $text).$space . $_;
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_glsentrydesc{
+   local($_) = @_;
+
+   $label = &missing_braces unless
+             (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo);
+
+   &gls_get_description($label).$_;
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_Glsentrydesc{
+   local($_) = @_;
+
+   $label = &missing_braces unless
+             (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo);
+
+   ucfirst(&gls_get_description($label)).$_;
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_glsentrytext{
+   local($_) = @_;
+
+   $label = &missing_braces unless
+             (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo);
+
+   &gls_get_text($label).$_;
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_Glsentrytext{
+   local($_) = @_;
+
+   $label = &missing_braces unless
+             (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo);
+
+   ucfirst(&gls_get_text($label)).$_;
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_glsentryname{
+   local($_) = @_;
+
+   $label = &missing_braces unless
+             (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo);
+
+   &gls_get_name($label).$_;
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_Glsentryname{
+   local($_) = @_;
+
+   $label = &missing_braces unless
+             (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo);
+
+   ucfirst(&gls_get_name($label)).$_;
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_glsentryfirst{
+   local($_) = @_;
+
+   $label = &missing_braces unless
+             (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo);
+
+   &gls_get_first($label).$_;
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_Glsentryfirst{
+   local($_) = @_;
+
+   $label = &missing_braces unless
+             (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo);
+
+   ucfirst(&gls_get_first($label)).$_;
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_glsentryplural{
+   local($_) = @_;
+
+   $label = &missing_braces unless
+             (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo);
+
+   &gls_get_plural($label).$_;
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_Glsentryplural{
+   local($_) = @_;
+
+   $label = &missing_braces unless
+             (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo);
+
+   ucfirst(&gls_get_plural($label)).$_;
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_glsentryfirstplural{
+   local($_) = @_;
+
+   $label = &missing_braces unless
+             (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo);
+
+   local($text)=$glsentry{$label}{'firstplural'};
+
+   unless (defined($text))
+   {
+      &write_warnings("glossary entry '$label' has not been defined");
+      $text = '';
+   }
+
+   "$text$_";
+   &gls_get_firstplural($label).$_;
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_Glsentryfirstplural{
+   local($_) = @_;
+
+   $label = &missing_braces unless
+             (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo);
+
+   ucfirst(&gls_get_firstplural($label)).$_;
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_glsentrysymbol{
+   local($_) = @_;
+
+   $label = &missing_braces unless
+             (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo);
+
+   &gls_get_symbol($label).$_;
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_Glsentrysymbol{
+   local($_) = @_;
+
+   $label = &missing_braces unless
+             (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo);
+
+   ucfirst(&gls_get_symbol($label)).$_;
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_gls{
+   local($_) = @_;
+   local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert);
+
+   ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument;
+
+   ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg);
+
+   $label = &missing_braces unless
+             (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo);
+
+   local ($space) = '';
+   if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';}
+
+   $insert = '';
+   ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument;
+
+   local($display) = '';
+
+   local($type) = &gls_get_type($label);
+
+   if (&gls_used($label))
+   {
+      # entry has already been used
+
+      $text = &gls_get_text($label);
+      $display = &gls_get_display($type);;
+   }
+   else
+   {
+      # entry hasn't been used
+
+      $text = &gls_get_first($label);
+      $display = &gls_get_displayfirst($type);
+
+      &unset_entry($label);
+   }
+
+   local($args) = '';
+
+   local($id) = ++$global{'max_id'};
+   $args .= "$OP$id$CP$text$OP$id$CP";
+
+   $id = ++$global{'max_id'};
+   $args .= "$OP$id$CP$glsentry{$label}{description}$OP$id$CP";
+
+   $id = ++$global{'max_id'};
+   $args .= "$OP$id$CP$glsentry{$label}{symbol}$OP$id$CP";
+
+   $id = ++$global{'max_id'};
+   $args .= "$OP$id$CP$insert$OP$id$CP";
+
+   local($link_text) = &translate_commands("$display$args");
+
+   &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, $link_text) .$space . $_;
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_glspl{
+   local($_) = @_;
+   local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert);
+
+   ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument;
+
+   ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg);
+
+   $label = &missing_braces unless
+             (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo);
+
+   local ($space) = '';
+   if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';}
+
+   $insert = '';
+   ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument;
+
+   local($display) = '';
+
+   local($type) = $glsentry{$label}{'type'};
+
+   if (&gls_used($label))
+   {
+      # entry has already been used
+
+      $text = &gls_get_plural($label);
+      $display = &gls_get_display($type);;
+   }
+   else
+   {
+      # entry hasn't been used
+
+      $text = &gls_get_firstplural($label);
+      $display = &gls_get_displayfirst($type);
+
+      &unset_entry($label);
+   }
+
+   local($args) = '';
+
+   local($id) = ++$global{'max_id'};
+   $args .= "$OP$id$CP$text$OP$id$CP";
+
+   $id = ++$global{'max_id'};
+   $args .= "$OP$id$CP$glsentry{$label}{description}$OP$id$CP";
+
+   $id = ++$global{'max_id'};
+   $args .= "$OP$id$CP$glsentry{$label}{symbol}$OP$id$CP";
+
+   $id = ++$global{'max_id'};
+   $args .= "$OP$id$CP$insert$OP$id$CP";
+
+   local($link_text) = &translate_commands("$display$args");
+
+   &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, $link_text) . $space . $_;
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_Gls{
+   local($_) = @_;
+   local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert);
+
+   ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument;
+
+   ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg);
+
+   $label = &missing_braces unless
+             (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo);
+
+   local ($space) = '';
+   if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';}
+
+   $insert = '';
+   ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument;
+
+   local($display) = '';
+
+   local($type) = $glsentry{$label}{'type'};
+
+   if (&gls_used($label))
+   {
+      # entry has already been used
+
+      $text = &gls_get_text($label);
+      $display = &gls_get_display($type);;
+   }
+   else
+   {
+      # entry hasn't been used
+
+      $text = &gls_get_first($label);
+      $display = &gls_get_displayfirst($type);
+
+      &unset_entry($label);
+   }
+
+   local($args) = '';
+
+   local($id) = ++$global{'max_id'};
+   $args .= "$OP$id$CP$text$OP$id$CP";
+
+   $id = ++$global{'max_id'};
+   $args .= "$OP$id$CP$glsentry{$label}{description}$OP$id$CP";
+
+   $id = ++$global{'max_id'};
+   $args .= "$OP$id$CP$glsentry{$label}{symbol}$OP$id$CP";
+
+   $id = ++$global{'max_id'};
+   $args .= "$OP$id$CP$insert$OP$id$CP";
+
+   local($link_text) = &translate_commands("$display$args");
+
+   &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, ucfirst($link_text)). $space . $_;
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_Glspl{
+   local($_) = @_;
+   local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert);
+
+   ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument;
+
+   ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg);
+
+   $label = &missing_braces unless
+             (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo);
+
+   local ($space) = '';
+   if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';}
+
+   $insert = '';
+   ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument;
+
+   local($display) = '';
+
+   local($type) = $glsentry{$label}{'type'};
+
+   if (&gls_used($label))
+   {
+      # entry has already been used
+
+      $text = &gls_get_plural($label);
+      $display = &gls_get_display($type);;
+   }
+   else
+   {
+      # entry hasn't been used
+
+      $text = &gls_get_firstplural($label);
+      $display = &gls_get_displayfirst($type);
+
+      &unset_entry($label);
+   }
+
+   local($args) = '';
+
+   local($id) = ++$global{'max_id'};
+   $args .= "$OP$id$CP$text$OP$id$CP";
+
+   $id = ++$global{'max_id'};
+   $args .= "$OP$id$CP$glsentry{$label}{description}$OP$id$CP";
+
+   $id = ++$global{'max_id'};
+   $args .= "$OP$id$CP$glsentry{$label}{symbol}$OP$id$CP";
+
+   $id = ++$global{'max_id'};
+   $args .= "$OP$id$CP$insert$OP$id$CP";
+
+   local($link_text) = &translate_commands("$display$args");
+
+   &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, ucfirst($link_text)).$space . $_;
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_GLS{
+   local($_) = @_;
+   local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert);
+
+   ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument;
+
+   ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg);
+
+   $label = &missing_braces unless
+             (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo);
+
+   local ($space) = '';
+   if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';}
+
+   $insert = '';
+   ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument;
+
+   local($display) = '';
+
+   local($type) = $glsentry{$label}{'type'};
+
+   if (&gls_used($label))
+   {
+      # entry has already been used
+
+      $text = &gls_get_text($label);
+      $display = &gls_get_display($type);;
+   }
+   else
+   {
+      # entry hasn't been used
+
+      $text = &gls_get_first($label);
+      $display = &gls_get_displayfirst($type);
+
+      &unset_entry($label);
+   }
+
+   local($args) = '';
+
+   local($id) = ++$global{'max_id'};
+   $args .= "$OP$id$CP$text$OP$id$CP";
+
+   $id = ++$global{'max_id'};
+   $args .= "$OP$id$CP$glsentry{$label}{description}$OP$id$CP";
+
+   $id = ++$global{'max_id'};
+   $args .= "$OP$id$CP$glsentry{$label}{symbol}$OP$id$CP";
+
+   $id = ++$global{'max_id'};
+   $args .= "$OP$id$CP$insert$OP$id$CP";
+
+   local($link_text) = &translate_commands("$display$args");
+
+   &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, uc($link_text)).$space . $_;
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_GLSpl{
+   local($_) = @_;
+   local($optarg,$pat,$label,$text, $format, $insert);
+
+   ($optarg,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument;
+
+   ($format,$optarg) = &get_keyval('format', $optarg);
+
+   $label = &missing_braces unless
+             (s/$next_pair_pr_rx/$label=$2;''/eo);
+
+   local ($space) = '';
+   if (/^\s+[^\[]/ or /^\s*\[.*\]\s/) {$space = ' ';}
+
+   $insert = '';
+   ($insert,$pat) = &get_next_optional_argument;
+
+   local($display) = '';
+
+   local($type) = $glsentry{$label}{'type'};
+
+   if (&gls_used($label))
+   {
+      # entry has already been used
+
+      $text = &gls_get_plural($label);
+      $display = &gls_get_display($type);;
+   }
+   else
+   {
+      # entry hasn't been used
+
+      $text = &gls_get_firstplural($label);
+      $display = &gls_get_displayfirst($type);
+
+      &unset_entry($label);
+   }
+
+   local($args) = '';
+
+   local($id) = ++$global{'max_id'};
+   $args .= "$OP$id$CP$text$OP$id$CP";
+
+   $id = ++$global{'max_id'};
+   $args .= "$OP$id$CP$glsentry{$label}{description}$OP$id$CP";
+
+   $id = ++$global{'max_id'};
+   $args .= "$OP$id$CP$glsentry{$label}{symbol}$OP$id$CP";
+
+   $id = ++$global{'max_id'};
+   $args .= "$OP$id$CP$insert$OP$id$CP";
+
+   local($link_text) = &translate_commands("$display$args");
+
+   &make_glslink($type, $label, $format, uc($link_text)).$space . $_;
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_glossarypreamble{
+   local($_) = @_;
+   $_[0];
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_glossarypostamble{
+   local($_) = @_;
+   $_[0];
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_glsnumformat{
+   local($_) = @_;
+
+   $_;
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_hyperit{
+   join('', "\\textit ", $_[0]);
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_hyperrm{
+   join('', "\\textrm ", $_[0]);
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_hypertt{
+   join('', "\\texttt ", $_[0]);
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_hypersf{
+   join('', "\\textsf ", $_[0]);
+}
+
+sub do_cmd_hyperbf{
+   join('', "\\textbf ", $_[0]);
+}
+
+&ignore_commands( <<_IGNORED_CMDS_ );
+makeglossary
+makeglossaries
+_IGNORED_CMDS_
+
+1;
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/scripts/makeglossaries b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/scripts/makeglossaries
new file mode 100755
index 00000000000..8da802b1791
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/scripts/makeglossaries
@@ -0,0 +1,210 @@
+#!/usr/bin/perl
+
+# File    : makeglossaries
+# Author  : Nicola Talbot
+# Version : 1.0 (2007/05/10)
+# Description: simple Perl script that calls makeindex.
+# Intended for use with "glossaries.sty" (saves having to remember
+# all the various switches)
+
+use Getopt::Std;
+
+if ($#ARGV < 0)
+{
+   die "Syntax : $0 [-ilqrcg] [-s sty] [-o gls] [-t log] [-p num] <filename>\n";
+}
+
+getopt('sotp');
+getopts('ilqrcg');
+
+# define known extensions
+
+ %exttype = (
+   main => {in=>'glo', out=>'gls', 'log'=>'glg'},
+ );
+
+$ext = '';
+
+if (length(@ARGV[0]) < 4)
+{
+   $name = @ARGV[0];
+}
+elsif (substr(@ARGV[0],-4,1) eq ".")
+{
+  $name = substr(@ARGV[0],0,length(@ARGV[0])-4);
+
+  $ext = substr(@ARGV[0],-3,3);
+}
+else
+{
+   $name = @ARGV[0];
+}
+
+$istfile = "$name.ist";
+
+# check log file for other glossary types
+# and for ist file name
+
+if (open AUXFILE, "$name.aux")
+{
+   while (<AUXFILE>)
+   {
+      if (m/\\\@newglossary\s*\{(.*)\}{(.*)}{(.*)}{(.*)}/
+        and ($1 ne 'main'))
+      {
+         $exttype{$1}{'log'} = $2;
+         $exttype{$1}{'out'} = $3;
+         $exttype{$1}{'in'}  = $4;
+
+         if (!$opt_q)
+         {
+            print "added glossary type '$1' ($2,$3,$4)\n";
+         }
+      }
+
+      if (m/\\\@istfilename\s*{([^}]*)}/)
+      {
+         $istfile = $1;
+      }
+   }
+
+   close AUXFILE;
+}
+else
+{
+   print "unable to open $name.aux\n";
+}
+
+# save all the general makeindex switches
+
+$mkidxopts = '';
+
+if ($opt_i)
+{
+   $mkidxopts .= " -i";
+}
+
+if ($opt_l)
+{
+   $mkidxopts .= " -l";
+}
+
+if ($opt_q)
+{
+   $mkidxopts .= " -q";
+}
+
+if ($opt_r)
+{
+   $mkidxopts .= " -r";
+}
+
+if ($opt_c)
+{
+   $mkidxopts .= " -c";
+}
+
+if ($opt_g)
+{
+   $mkidxopts .= " -g";
+}
+
+unless ($opt_p eq "")
+{
+   $mkidxopts .= " -p $opt_p";
+}
+
+unless ($opt_s eq "")
+{
+   $istfile = $opt_s;
+}
+
+if ($ext ne '')
+{
+   %thistype = %{$exttype{'main'}}; #default
+
+   foreach $type (keys %exttype)
+   {
+      if ($exttype{$type}{'in'} eq $ext)
+      {
+         %thistype = %{$exttype{$type}};
+
+         last;
+      }
+   }
+
+   if ($opt_o eq "")
+   {
+      $outfile = "$name.$thistype{out}";
+   }
+   else
+   {
+      $outfile = $opt_o;
+   }
+
+   if ($opt_t eq "")
+   {
+      $transcript = "$name.$thistype{'log'}";
+   }
+   else
+   {
+      $transcript = $opt_t;
+   }
+
+   &makeindex("$name.$ext",$outfile,$transcript,$istfile,
+              $mkidxopts,$opt_q);
+}
+else
+{
+   foreach $type (keys %exttype)
+   {
+      %thistype = %{$exttype{$type}};
+
+      $inputfile = "$name.$thistype{in}";
+
+      if (-r $inputfile)
+      {
+         if ($opt_o eq "")
+         {
+            $outfile = "$name.$thistype{out}";
+         }
+         else
+         {
+            $outfile = $opt_o;
+         }
+
+         if ($opt_t eq "")
+         {
+            $transcript = "$name.$thistype{'log'}";
+         }
+         else
+         {
+           $transcript = $opt_t;
+         }
+
+         &makeindex($inputfile,$outfile,$transcript,
+                    $istfile,$mkidxopts,$opt_q);
+      }
+      elsif (!$opt_q)
+      {
+         print "no read access for '$inputfile'\n";
+      }
+   }
+}
+
+sub makeindex{
+   local($in,$out,$trans,$ist,$rest,$quiet) = @_;
+   local($name,$cmdstr,$buffer,$n,$i,$j);
+   local(@stuff,@item);
+
+   $cmdstr = "$rest -s $ist -t $trans -o $out $in";
+
+   unless ($quiet)
+   {
+      print "makeindex $cmdstr\n";
+   }
+
+   `makeindex $cmdstr`;
+}
+
+1;
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/scripts/makeglossaries.bat b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/scripts/makeglossaries.bat
new file mode 100755
index 00000000000..64a6a20750c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/scripts/makeglossaries.bat
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+@rem = '-*- Perl -*-

+@echo off

+perl -S "%~dp0makeglossaries" %*

diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/glossaries/glossaries.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/glossaries/glossaries.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c1f5e081b92
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/glossaries/glossaries.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,3413 @@
+%\iffalse
+% glossaries.dtx generated using makedtx version 0.91b (c) Nicola Talbot
+% Command line args:
+%   -src "glossaries.sty=>glossaries.sty"
+%   -src "(glossary-.+)\.(sty)\Z=>\1.\2"
+%   -doc "manual.tex"
+%   -author "Nicola Talbot"
+%   -dir "source"
+%   glossaries
+% Created on 2007/5/16 17:33
+%\fi
+%\iffalse
+%<*package>
+%% \CharacterTable
+%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%</package>
+%\fi
+% \iffalse
+% Doc-Source file to use with LaTeX2e
+% Copyright (C) 2007 Nicola Talbot, all rights reserved.
+% \fi
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass[a4paper]{ltxdoc}
+\usepackage{ifthen}
+\usepackage[colorlinks,
+            bookmarks,
+            hyperindex=false,
+            pdfauthor={N.L.C. Talbot},
+            pdftitle={glossaries.sty: LaTeX2e Package to Assist Generating Glossaries},
+            pdfkeywords={LaTeX,package,glossary,acronyms}]{hyperref}
+
+ %hyperindex conflicts with doc
+ %(end up with |usage|hyperpage in indexentry)
+ %This unfortunately means that the changes section doesn't
+ %have active links, but at least it will keep makeindex happy.
+
+
+\renewcommand{\usage}[1]{\textit{\hyperpage{#1}}}
+\renewcommand{\main}[1]{\hyperpage{#1}}
+\newcommand{\see}[2]{\emph{see} #1}
+\makeatletter
+\def\index@prologue{\section*{Index}}
+\makeatother
+\RecordChanges
+\PageIndex
+\CheckSum{2769}
+\CodelineNumbered
+
+
+\newcommand{\cmdname}[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}}
+
+\newcommand*{\istkey}[1]{\texttt{#1}\index{makeindex=\texttt{makeindex}>#1=\texttt{#1}|hyperpage}}
+\newcommand*{\icmdname}[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}\SpecialMainIndex{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\appname}[1]{\texttt{#1}\index{#1=\texttt{#1}|hyperpage}}
+\newcommand*{\mkidxspch}{\index{makeindex=\texttt{makeindex}>special characters|hyperpage}}
+\newcommand*{\igloskey}[2][newglossaryentry]{\index{#1 options=\cmdname{#1} options>#2=\textsf{#2}|hyperpage}}
+\newcommand*{\gloskey}[2][newglossaryentry]{\textsf{#2}\igloskey[#1]{#2}}
+\newcommand*{\pkgopt}[2][]{%
+\ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{%
+\textsf{#2}\index{package options>#2=\textsf{#2}|hyperpage}}{%
+\textsf{#2=#1}\index{package options>#2=\textsf{#2}>#1=\textsf{#1}|hyperpage}}}
+\newcommand*{\pkgoptval}[2]{\textsf{#1}\index{package options>#2>#1|hyperpage}}
+\newcommand*{\glostyle}[1]{\textsf{#1}\index{glossary styles>#1|hyperpage}}
+\newcommand*{\filetype}[1]{\texttt{#1}\index{file types>#1|hyperpage}}
+\newcommand*{\styname}[1]{\textsf{#1}\index{#1 package=\textsf{#1} package|hyperpage}}
+\newcommand*{\envname}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
+
+
+\begin{document}
+\DocInput{glossaries.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%\fi
+%\MakeShortVerb{"}
+%\DeleteShortVerb{\|}
+%
+% \title{glossaries.sty v 1.0: \LaTeXe\ Package to Assist Generating Glossaries}
+% \author{Nicola L.C. Talbot\\[10pt]
+%School of Computing Sciences\\
+%University of East Anglia\\
+%Norwich. Norfolk\\
+%NR4 7TJ. United Kingdom.\\
+%\url{http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/}}
+%
+% \date{16th May 2007}
+% \maketitle
+%\tableofcontents
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+% \changes{1.0}{2007 May 16}{Initial version}
+%The \styname{glossaries} package is provided to assist 
+%generating glossaries.  It has a certain amount of flexibility, 
+%allowing the user to customize the format of the glossary,
+%define new glossary styles, and multiple glossaries. It
+%also supports acronyms, and glossary styles which 
+%include symbols in addition to a name and description for a
+%given glossary entry. There is provision for loading a database
+%of glossary terms, where only those terms used in the
+%text are added to the glossary.  This
+%package replaces the \styname{glossary} package which is now
+%obsolete.
+%
+%The \styname{glossaries} package comes with the Perl script
+%\appname{makeglossaries} which will run \appname{makeindex} on
+%all the glossary files using a customized \appname{makeindex}
+%style file (which is created by \icmdname{makeglossaries}). 
+%The relevant extensions are obtained from the
+%auxiliary file, so you only need to pass the basename as the
+%argument. For example, if your document is called 
+%\texttt{myfile.tex}, do:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%latex myfile
+%makeglossaries myfile
+%latex myfile
+%\end{verbatim}
+%You may need to explicitly load \appname{makeglossaries} into
+%Perl:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%perl makeglossaries myfile
+%\end{verbatim}
+%There is a batch file called \texttt{makeglossaries.bat} which
+%does this for Windows users.
+%
+%\section{A Quick Guide For The Impatient}
+%
+%This section is for people who don't have the time or patience to
+%read the manual. If you want more detail, you will have to
+%read the rest of the manual.
+%
+%\begin{enumerate}
+%\item Load \styname{glossaries} \emph{after} \styname{hyperref}:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\usepackage{hyperref}
+%\usepackage{glossaries}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%Similarly for the \styname{html} package:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\usepackage{html}
+%\usepackage{glossaries}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%\item Always use \icmdname{makeglossaries} if you want the glossary
+%entries to be written to the glossary file:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\documentclass{article}
+%\usepackage{glossaries}
+%\makeglossaries
+%\end{verbatim}
+%If you don't use \icmdname{makeglossaries}, your glossaries will
+%not appear in the document!
+%
+%\item Use \icmdname{printglossaries} to make your glossaries appear 
+%in the document at that point. For example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\maketitle
+%\printglossaries
+%\section{Introduction}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%Note that only the glossary entries that have been used in the
+%document text will appear in the glossary.
+%
+%\item When you have created your document, run \LaTeX\ on it,
+%then the Perl script \appname{makeglossaries}, then run \LaTeX\
+%on it again:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%latex myfile
+%makeglossaries myfile
+%latex myfile
+%\end{verbatim}
+%If you use Windows, there is a batch file called 
+%\texttt{makeglossaries.bat} which you can use, but you will
+%still need Perl installed.
+%
+%\item New glossaries can be defined using:\par
+%\icmdname{newglossary}%
+%\marg{label}\marg{in-ext}\marg{out-ext}%
+%\marg{title}\par where \meta{label} is an identifying label,
+%\meta{in-ext} is the extension of the file to be created
+%by \appname{makeindex} (called by \appname{makeglossaries}),
+%\meta{out-ext} is the extension of the file to be read by
+%\appname{makeindex} and \meta{title} is the title for this
+%new glossary. Example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\newglossary{notation}{not}{ntn}{Notation}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%This glossary's label is \texttt{notation} and its title
+%will be Notation.
+%
+%\item Any new glossaries must be defined before 
+%\cmdname{makeglossaries}
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\documentclass{article}
+%\usepackage{glossaries}
+%\newglossary{notation}{not}{ntn}{Notation}
+%\makeglossaries
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%\item If you use the \pkgopt{acronym} package option, the 
+%\styname{glossaries} package
+%will automatically create a new glossary type labelled
+%\texttt{acronym}:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\usepackage[acronym]{glossaries}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%\item If your pages have a hyphen compositor (i.e.\ your page
+%numbers appear in the form 2-1), redefine \icmdname{glscompositor}
+%\emph{before} \icmdname{makeglossaries}:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\documentclass{article}
+%\usepackage{glossaries}
+%\renewcommand{\glscompositor}{-}
+%\makeglossaries
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%\item To add the glossaries to the table of contents use the
+%\pkgopt{toc} package option:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\usepackage[toc]{glossaries}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%\item Define a new entry with:\par
+%\icmdname{newglossaryentry}\marg{label}\marg{key-val list}\par
+%The \meta{key-val list} must at least contain a \gloskey{name}
+%key and a \gloskey{description} key.
+%For example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\newglossaryentry{perl}{name=Perl,
+%description=A scripting language}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%In this example, I have given the entry the label \texttt{perl}.
+%Whenever I want to use this entry, that is the label I need
+%to use to identify it.
+%
+%\item If the entry name starts with an accented letter, you will
+%need to group the first letter (otherwise it will cause a
+%problem for \icmdname{Gls} and \icmdname{Glspl}):
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\newglossaryentry{elite}{name={{\'e}lite},
+%description={select group or class}}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%\item If you have multiple glossaries, use the \gloskey{type}
+%key to specify in which glossary the entry belongs. For example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\newglossary{languages}{lan}{lng}{Index of Languages}
+%
+%\makeglossaries
+%
+%\newglossaryentry{perl}{name=Perl,
+%description=A scripting language,
+%type=languages}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%If \gloskey{type} is omitted, the default glossary is used.
+%
+%\item Remember to group values that have a comma or equal sign.
+%For example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\newglossaryentry{pagelist}{name=page list,
+%description={A list of individual pages or page ranges
+%(e.g.\ 1,2,4,7--9)}}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%\item Plural forms are assumed to be the singular form with an
+%``s'' appended, unless otherwise specified. To specify an
+%irregular plural, use the \gloskey{plural} key. For example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\newglossaryentry{matrix}{name=matrix,
+%description=rectangular array of quantities,
+%plural=matrices}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%\item The way the term appears in the main text can be different
+%from the way the term appears in the glossary:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\newglossaryentry{matrix}{name=Matrix,
+%description=rectangular array of quantities,
+%text=matrix,
+%plural=matrices}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%In this example, the entry name appears as Matrix in the 
+%glossary, and either matrix or matrices in the text.
+%
+%\item The way the term appears on first use can be different
+%to the way it appears subsequently:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\newglossaryentry{singmtx}{name=Singular Matrix,
+%description=A matrix with a zero determinant,
+%first=singular matrix (SM),
+%text=SM,
+%firstplural=singular matrices (SMs)}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%In this example, the entry name appears as Singular Matrix in
+%the glossary, and in the text it appears as singular matrix (SM)
+%or singular matrices (SMs) the first time the entry is used,
+%and subsequently appears as SM or SMs.
+%
+%\item The quick and easy way to define an acronym is to use:\par
+%\icmdname{newacronym}\oarg{key-val list}\marg{label}\marg{abbrev}%
+%\marg{long}\par
+%For example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\newacronym{svm}{SVM}{support vector machine}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%This is equivalent to:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\newglossaryentry{svm}{type=\acronymtype,
+%name={SVM},
+%description={support vector machine},
+%text={SVM},
+%first={support vector machine (SVM)},
+%plural={SVMs},
+%firstplural={support vector machines (SVMs)}}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%(The value of \icmdname{acronymtype} varies depending on whether
+%the glossary package option \pkgopt{acronym} is used or not.
+%The optional argument \meta{key-val list} can be used to
+%override any of the \icmdname{newglossaryentry} keys, for
+%example, if the acronym has an irregular plural.)
+%
+%\item The font used to display the entry name in the glossary
+%is governed by \icmdname{glsnamefont}. This can be redefined
+%as required. For example, to make the entry names appear
+%in a medium sans-serif font do:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\renewcommand{\glsnamefont}[1]{\textsf{\mdseries #1}}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%Note that the list-like glossary styles defined in the
+%\styname{glossary-list} package place the entry name in
+%the optional argument to \icmdname{item}, so they will
+%appear in bold, unless you redefine \icmdname{glsnamefont}.
+%
+%\item In the document use \icmdname{gls}\marg{label}
+%to use a predefined term (this will also enter the term into 
+%the associated glossary output file.) For example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%A \gls{singmtx} is a matrix with a zero determinant.
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%\item Other variations:
+%\begin{itemize}
+%\item \icmdname{Gls}\marg{label} : like \cmdname{gls},
+%but with first letter in upper case
+%\item \icmdname{GLS}\marg{label} : like \cmdname{gls},
+%but all upper case.
+%\item \icmdname{glspl}\marg{label} : use plural
+%\item \icmdname{Glspl}\marg{label} : use plural with
+%first letter in upper case
+%\item \icmdname{GLSpl}\marg{label} : use plural but
+%all upper case
+%\item \icmdname{glslink}\marg{label}\marg{link text} :
+%use \meta{link text} to link to the given entry in the glossary.
+%\end{itemize}
+%For example, the following will produce the plural form with
+%the first letter in uppercase:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\Glspl{singmtx} are matrices with a zero determinant.
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%\item Additional text can be appended to the link using the
+%end optional argument. For example, to form the possessive:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%The \gls{singmtx}['s] dimensions are not necessarily equal.
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%\item The format of the associated entry number can be
+%changed using the \gloskey[glslink]{format} key in the optional argument.
+%Note that the value of the \gloskey[glslink]{format} key should be the
+%name of a command \emph{without} the initial backslash. For
+%example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%The primary definition of \glspl[format=textbf]{singmtx}.
+%\end{verbatim}
+%In this example the relevant glossary entry will have the
+%page number in bold (since it uses \cmdname{textbf}) but
+%it will no longer have a hyperlink (if hyperlinks are enabled.)
+%
+%\item The \styname{glossaries} package provides commands to
+%change the font whilst ensuring that the number remains a
+%hyperlink. These are of the form \cmdname{hyper}\meta{xx} and
+%are equivalent to the standard font changing commands of the
+%form \cmdname{text}\meta{xx}, as well as \icmdname{hyperemph}
+%(which uses \icmdname{emph}.) For example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%The primary definition of \glspl[format=hyperbf]{singmtx}.
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%\item Entries can be added to the glossary without producing
+%any text using \icmdname{glsadd}\marg{label} or
+%\icmdname{glsaddall}.
+%
+%\item Only those terms that have actually been used in the
+%document will be placed in the glossary. If you have defined
+%a term that doesn't appear in the document, then it means
+%you haven't used it in the text (either via \icmdname{glslink}
+%or \icmdname{gls} and related commands, or via \icmdname{glsadd}
+%or \icmdname{glsaddall}.)
+%
+%\item To change the sorting order, use the \gloskey{sort} key.
+%For example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\newglossaryentry{universal}{name={\ensuremath{\mathcal{U}}},
+%description=The universal set,
+%sort=U}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%\item You don't need to escape \appname{makeindex}'s special characters:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\newglossaryentry{quote}{name={"},
+%description={Double quote character}}
+%
+%\newglossaryentry{exclam}{name={!},
+%description={Exclamation mark}}
+%
+%\newacronym{rna}{RNA}{ribonukleins\"aure}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%\item Associated symbols can also be specified, but whether the
+%symbol appears in the glossary depends on the glossary style.
+%For example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\newglossaryentry{metre}{name={metre},
+%description={A metric measurement of length},
+%symbol={m}}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%The predefined glossary styles that display the entry symbol
+%are: \glostyle{long4col}, \glostyle{long4colheader},
+%\glostyle{long4colborder}, \glostyle{long4colheaderborder},
+%\glostyle{super4col}, \glostyle{super4colheader}, 
+%\glostyle{super4colborder} and \glostyle{super4colheaderborder}.
+%All the other styles supplied by this package ignore the associated 
+%symbol.
+%
+%\item Glossary styles can be set using the \pkgopt{style} 
+%package option. For example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\usepackage[style=long3col]{glossary}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%or using \icmdname{glossarystyle}\marg{style}. For example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\glossarystyle{altlist}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%The predefined glossary styles provided by the \styname{glossaries}
+%bundle are detailed in \autoref{sec:styles}.
+%
+%\item The list of numbers associated with each glossary entry
+%can be suppressed using the package option \pkgopt{nonumberlist}:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\usepackage[nonumberlist]{glossaries}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%\item By default, the glossaries will appear in an unnumbered 
+%chapter if chapters are defined, otherwise in an unnumbered
+%section. This can be changed using the \pkgopt{section} package
+%option. For example, to make the glossaries appear in an unnumbered
+%section, even if chapters are defined, do:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\usepackage[section]{glossaries}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%Other sectional units can also be specified as 
+%\pkgopt{section}=\meta{value}. For example, to make the glossaries
+%appear in unnumbered subsections:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\usepackage[section=subsection]{glossaries}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%\end{enumerate}
+%
+% \StopEventually{\phantomsection\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Index}\PrintIndex}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+%\section{The Code}
+%\iffalse
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*glossaries.sty>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\fi
+% \subsection{Package Definition}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesPackage{glossaries}[2007/05/16 v1.0 (NLCT)]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Required packages:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{ifthen}
+\RequirePackage{xkeyval}[2006/11/18]
+\RequirePackage{xspace}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Package Options}\label{sec:pkgopt}
+% The \pkgopt{toc} package option will add the glossaries 
+% to the table of contents. This is a boolean key, if the
+% value is omitted it is taken to be true.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@boolkey{glossaries.sty}[gls]{toc}[true]{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\@@glossarysec}
+% The sectional unit used to start the glossary is stored in
+% \cmdname{@@glossarysec}. If chapters are defined, this
+% is initialised to \texttt{chapter}, otherwise it is
+% initialised to \texttt{section}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{\newcommand*{\@@glossarysec}{section}}{%
+\newcommand*{\@@glossarysec}{chapter}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \pkgopt{section} key can be used to set the sectional unit.
+% If no unit is specified, use \texttt{section} as the default.
+% The starred form of the named sectional unit will be used.
+% If you want some other way to start the glossary section (e.g.\ 
+% a numbered section) you will have to redefined 
+% \icmdname{glossarysection}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@choicekey{glossaries.sty}{section}{part,chapter,section,%
+subsection,subsubsection,paragraph,subparagraph}[section]{%
+\renewcommand*{\@@glossarysec}{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\@glossary@default@style}
+% The default glossary style is stored in 
+% \cmdname{@glossary@default@style}. This is initialised to
+% \texttt{list}. (The \glostyle{list} style is
+% defined in the accompanying \styname{glossary-list} package
+% described in \autoref{sec:styles}.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@glossary@default@style}{list}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The default glossary style can be changed using the \pkgopt{style}
+% package option. The value can be the name of any
+% defined glossary style. The glossary style is set at the beginning
+% of the document, so you can still use the \pkgopt{style} key to
+% set a style that is defined in another package. This package comes
+% with some predefined styles that are defined in 
+% \autoref{sec:styles}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{glossaries.sty}{style}{%
+\renewcommand*{\@glossary@default@style}{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Each entry within a given glossary will have an associated
+% number list. By default, this refers to the page numbers on
+% which that entry has been used, but it can also refer to any counter
+% used in the document (such as the section or equation counters).
+% The default number list format displays the number list ``as is'':
+%\DescribeMacro{\glossaryentrynumbers}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glossaryentrynumbers}[1]{#1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Note that the entire number list for a given entry will be
+% passed to \cmdname{glossaryentrynumbers} so any font changes
+% will also be applied to the delimiters.
+% The \pkgopt{nonumberlist} package option suppresses the 
+% number lists (this simply redefines 
+% \cmdname{glossaryentrynumbers} to ignores its argument.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOptionX{nonumberlist}{%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryentrynumbers}[1]{}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\glsdefaulttype}
+% Keep track of the default glossary. This is initialised to
+% the main glossary, but can be changed if for some reason
+% you want to make a secondary glossary the main glossary. This
+% affects any commands that can optionally take a glossary name
+% as an argument (or as the value of the 
+% \gloskey{type}\igloskey[printglossary]{type} key in 
+%a key-value list.) This was mainly done so that 
+% \icmdname{loadglsentries} can temporarily change 
+% \cmdname{glsdefaulttype} while it loads a file containing
+% new glossary entries (see \autoref{sec:load}).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\glsdefaulttype}{main}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\DescribeMacro{\acronymtype}
+% Keep track of which glossary the acronyms are in. This is 
+% initialised to \cmdname{glsdefaulttype}, but is changed by
+% the \pkgopt{acronym} package option.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\acronymtype}{\glsdefaulttype}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \pkgopt{acronym} option sets an associated conditional 
+% which is used in \autoref{sec:acronym} to determine whether
+% or not to define a separate glossary for acronyms.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@boolkey{glossaries.sty}[gls]{acronym}[true]{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\glscounter}
+% The default counter associated with the numbers in the glossary
+% is stored in \cmdname{glscounter}. This is initialised to the 
+% page counter. This is used as the default counter when a
+% new glossary is defined, unless a different counter is specified
+% in the optional argument to \icmdname{newglossary} (see
+% \autoref{sec:newglos}).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\glscounter}{page}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \pkgopt{counter} option changes the default counter. (This
+% just redefines \cmdname{glscounter}.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{glossaries.sty}{counter}{%
+\renewcommand*{\glscounter}{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The glossary keys whose values are written to another file (i.e.\
+% \gloskey{sort}, \gloskey{name}, \gloskey{description} and
+% \gloskey{symbol}) need to be sanitized, otherwise fragile
+% commands would not be able to be used in 
+% \icmdname{newglossaryentry}. However, strange results will occur
+% if you then use those fields in the document. As these fields
+% are not normally used in the document, but are by default only
+% used in the glossary, the default is to sanitize them. If however
+% you want to use these values in the document (either by redefining
+% commands like \icmdname{glsdisplay} or by using commands like
+% \icmdname{glsentrydesc}) you will have to switch off the 
+% sanitization using the \pkgopt{sanitize} package option, but
+% you will then have to use \icmdname{protect} to protect fragile 
+% commands when defining new glossary entries. 
+% The \pkgopt{sanitize} option
+% takes a key-value list as its value, which can be used to 
+% switch individual values on and off. For example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\usepackage[sanitize={description,name,symbol=false}]{glossaries}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%will switch off the sanitization for the \gloskey{symbol} key, but
+% switch it on for the \gloskey{description} and \gloskey{name} keys.
+% This would mean that you can use fragile commands in the
+%description and name when defining a new glossary entry, but not
+% for the symbol.
+%
+% The default values are defined as:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@gls@sanitizedesc}{\@onelevel@sanitize\@glo@desc}
+\newcommand*{\@gls@sanitizename}{\@onelevel@sanitize\@glo@name}
+\newcommand*{\@gls@sanitizesymbol}{\@onelevel@sanitize\@glo@symbol}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% (There is no equivalent for the \gloskey{sort} key, since that
+% is only provided for the benefit of \appname{makeindex}, and
+% so will always be sanitized.)
+%
+% Before defining the \pkgopt{sanitize} package option, The 
+% key-value list for the \pkgopt{sanitize} value needs to be defined.
+% These are all boolean keys. If they are not given a value, assume
+% \texttt{true}.
+%
+% Firstly the \gloskey{description}. If set, it will redefine
+% \cmdname{@gls@sanitizedesc} to use \cmdname{@onelevel@sanitize},
+% otherwise \cmdname{@gls@sanitizedesc} will do nothing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@boolkey[gls]{sanitize}{description}[true]{%
+\ifgls@sanitize@description
+  \renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizedesc}{\@onelevel@sanitize\@glo@desc}%
+\else
+  \renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizedesc}{}%
+\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Similarly for the \gloskey{name} key:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@boolkey[gls]{sanitize}{name}[true]{%
+\ifgls@sanitize@name
+  \renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizename}{\@onelevel@sanitize\@glo@name}%
+\else
+  \renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizename}{}%
+\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% and for the \gloskey{symbol} key:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@boolkey[gls]{sanitize}{symbol}[true]{%
+\ifgls@sanitize@symbol
+  \renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizesymbol}{%
+\@onelevel@sanitize\@glo@symbol}%
+\else
+  \renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizesymbol}{}%
+\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Now define the \pkgopt{sanitize} option. It can either take
+% a key-val list as its value, or it can take the keyword
+% \texttt{none}, which is equivalent to \texttt{description=false,
+% symbol=false, name=false}:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{glossaries.sty}{sanitize}[description=true,symbol=true,
+name=true]{%
+\ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{none}}{%
+\renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizedesc}{}%
+\renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizename}{}%
+\renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizesymbol}{}%
+}{\setkeys[gls]{sanitize}{#1}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Process package options:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ProcessOptionsX
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% If chapters are defined and the user has requested the
+% section counter as a package option, \cmdname{@chapter} will
+% be modified so 
+% that it adds a \texttt{section.}\meta{n}\texttt{.0} target, 
+% otherwise entries placed before the first section of a chapter
+% will have undefined links.
+%
+% The same problem will also occur if a lower sectional unit is
+% used, but this is less likely to happen. If it does, or if
+% you change \cmdname{glscounter} to "section" later, you
+% will have to specify a different counter for the entries
+% that give rise to a \texttt{name}"{"\meta{section-level}"."\meta{n}".0}"
+% non-existent warning (e.g. "\gls[counter=chapter]{label}").
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifthenelse{\equal{\glscounter}{section}}{%
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{%
+\let\@gls@old@chapter\@chapter
+\def\@chapter[#1]#2{\@gls@old@chapter[{#1}]{#2}%
+\@ifundefined{hyperdef}{}{\hyperdef{section}{\thesection}{}}}}}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\subsection{Default values}
+% This section sets up default values that are used by this
+% package. Some of the names may already be defined (e.g.\ by
+% \styname{babel}) so \cmdname{providecommand} is used.
+%
+% Main glossary title:
+%\DescribeMacro{\glossaryname}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossary}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\DescribeMacro{\acronymname}
+% The title for the "acronym" glossary type (which is defined if 
+% \pkgopt{acronym} package option is used) is given by
+% \cmdname{acronymname}. If the \pkgopt{acronym}
+% package option is not used, \cmdname{acronymname} won't be used.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand*{\acronymname}{Acronyms}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following commands provide text for the headers used by 
+% some of the tabular-like glossary 
+% styles. Whether or not they get used in the glossary depends on
+% the glossary style.
+%\DescribeMacro{\entryname}
+%\DescribeMacro{\descriptionname}
+%\DescribeMacro{\symbolname}
+%\DescribeMacro{\pagelistname}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand*{\entryname}{Notation}
+\providecommand*{\descriptionname}{Description}
+\providecommand*{\symbolname}{Symbol}
+\providecommand*{\pagelistname}{Page List}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Labels for \appname{makeindex}'s symbol and number groups:
+%\DescribeMacro{\glssymbolsgroupname}\DescribeMacro{\glsnumbersgroupname}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symbols}
+\providecommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Numbers}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\istfilename}
+% The name of the \appname{makeindex} style file is given by
+% \cmdname{istfilename}. This file is 
+% created by \icmdname{writeist} (which is used by 
+% \icmdname{makeglossaries}) so
+% redefining this command will only have an effect if it is 
+% done \emph{before} the \filetype{ist} file is created.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand*{\istfilename}{\jobname.ist}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \appname{makeglossaries} Perl script picks up this name
+% from the auxiliary file and passes it to \appname{makeindex}
+% using the \texttt{-s} option. Since its not required by
+% \LaTeX, \cmdname{@istfilename} ignores its argument.
+%\DescribeMacro{\@istfilename}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@istfilename}[1]{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\glscompositor}
+% This command is the value of the \istkey{page\_compositor}
+% \appname{makeindex} key. Again, any redefinition of this command 
+% must take place \emph{before} \cmdname{writeist} otherwise it 
+% will have no effect.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\glscompositor}{.}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% (The page compositor is usually defined as a dash when using
+% \appname{makeindex}, but most of the standard counters used
+% by \LaTeX\ use a full stop as the compositor, which is why I
+% have used it as the default.)
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\glsnumberformat}
+% The command \cmdname{glsnumberformat} indicates the default
+% format for the page numbers in the glossary. (Note that this
+% is not the same as \icmdname{glossaryentrynumbers}, but applies
+% to individual numbers or groups of numbers within an entry's
+% associated number list.) If hyperlinks are defined, it will use
+% \icmdname{glshypernumber}, otherwise it will simply display its 
+% argument ``as is''.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{hyperlink}{%
+\newcommand*{\glsnumberformat}[1]{#1}}{%
+\newcommand*{\glsnumberformat}[1]{\glshypernumber{#1}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\DescribeMacro{\delimN}
+% Individual numbers in an entry's associated number list are
+% delimited using \cmdname{delimN} (which corresponds to the 
+% \istkey{delim\_n} \appname{makeindex} keyword.) The default value
+% is a comma followed by a space.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\delimN}{, }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\DescribeMacro{\delimR}
+% A range of numbers within an entry's associated number list is
+% delimited using \cmdname{delimR} (which corresponds to the
+% \istkey{delim\_r} \appname{makeindex} keyword.) The default is
+% an en-dash.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\delimR}{--}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\glossarypreamble}
+% The glossary preamble is given by \cmdname{glossarypreamble}. This
+% will appear after the glossary sectioning command, and before the
+% \envname{theglossary} environment. It is designed to allow the
+% user to add information pertaining to the glossary (e.g.\ ``page
+% numbers in italic indicate the primary definition'') therefore 
+% \cmdname{glossarypremable} shouldn't be affected by the glossary
+% style. (So if you define your own glossary style, don't have it 
+% change \cmdname{glossarypreamble}.) The preamble is empty by
+% default. If you have multiple glossaries, and you want a 
+% different preamble for each glossary, you will need to use
+% \icmdname{printglossary} for each glossary type, instead of 
+% \icmdname{printglossaries}, and redefine \cmdname{glossarypreamble}
+% before each \icmdname{printglossary}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glossarypreamble}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\glossarypostamble}
+% The glossary postamble is given by \cmdname{glossarypostamble}.
+% This is provided to allow the user to
+% add something after the end of the \envname{theglossary}
+% environment (again, this shouldn't be affected by the
+% glossary style.) It is, of course, possible to simply add the
+% text after \icmdname{printglossary}, but if you only want the
+% postamble to appear after the first glossary, but not after 
+% subsequent glossaries, you can do something like:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\renewcommand{\glossarypostamble}{For a complete list of terms
+%see \cite{blah}\gdef\glossarypreamble{}}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glossarypostamble}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\glossarysection}
+% The sectioning command that starts a glossary is given by
+% \cmdname{glossarysection}. (This does not form part of the
+% glossary style, and so should not be changed by a glossary
+% style.) If \icmdname{phantomsection}
+% is defined, it uses \cmdname{\@p@glossarysection}, otherwise it
+% uses \cmdname{@glossarysection}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glossarysection}[2][\@gls@title]{%
+\def\@gls@title{#2}%
+\@ifundefined{phantomsection}{%
+\@glossarysection{#1}{#2}}{\@p@glossarysection{#1}{#2}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The required sectional unit is given by \cmdname{@@glossarysec}
+% which was defined by the \pkgopt{section} package option. The
+% starred form of the command is chosen. If you want a numbered 
+% section for the glossary or if you don't want any sectional
+% command, you will need to redefine \cmdname{glossarysection}.
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\@glossarysection}
+%The command \cmdname{@glossarysection} indicates how to start
+% the glossary section if \icmdname{phantomsection} is not defined.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@glossarysection}[2]{%
+\csname\@@glossarysec\endcsname*{#2}
+\@gls@toc{#1}{\@@glossarysec}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\@p@glossarysection}
+% As \cmdname{@glossarysection}, but put in 
+% \icmdname{phantomsection}, and swap where \cmdname{@gls@toc} goes. 
+% If using chapters do a \cmdname{clearpage}. This ensures that
+% the hyper link from the table of contents leads to the line above
+% the heading, rather than the line below it.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@p@glossarysection}[2]{%
+\gls@doclearpage
+\phantomsection\@gls@toc{#1}{\@@glossarysec}%
+\csname\@@glossarysec\endcsname*{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\gls@doclearpage}
+%The \cmdname{gls@doclearpage} command is used to issue a
+% \cmdname{clearpage} (or \cmdname{cleardoublepage}) depending
+% on whether the glossary sectional unit is a chapter. If the
+% sectional unit is something else, do nothing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\gls@doclearpage}{%
+\ifthenelse{\equal{\@@glossarysec}{chapter}}{%
+\@ifundefined{cleardoublepage}{\clearpage}{\cleardoublepage}}{}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\@gls@toc}
+% The glossary is added to the table of contents if glstoc flag set.
+% If it is set, \cmdname{@gls@toc} will add a line to the 
+% \filetype{toc} file, otherwise it will do nothing.
+% (The first argument to \cmdname{@gls@toc} is the title for the
+% table of contents, the second argument is the sectioning type.) 
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@gls@toc}[2]{%
+\ifglstoc \addcontentsline{toc}{#2}{#1}\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\subsection{Loops and conditionals}
+%\DescribeMacro{\forallglossaries}
+% To iterate through all glossaries (or comma-separated list of
+% glossary names given in optional argument) use:\\[10pt]
+% \cmdname{forallglossaries}\oarg{glossary list}\marg{cmd}\marg{code}\\[10pt]
+% where \meta{cmd} is
+% a control sequence which will be set to the name of the
+% glossary in the current iteration.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\forallglossaries}[3][\@glo@types]{%
+\@for#2:=#1\do{\ifthenelse{\equal{#2}{}}{}{#3}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\forglsentries}
+% To iterate through all entries in a given glossary use:\\[10pt]
+%\cmdname{forglsentries}\oarg{type}\marg{cmd}\marg{code}\\[10pt]
+%where \meta{type} is the glossary label and \meta{cmd} is a
+% control sequence which will be set to the entry label in the
+% current iteration.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\forglsentries}[3][\glsdefaulttype]{%
+\edef\@@glo@list{\csname glolist@#1\endcsname}%
+\@for#2:=\@@glo@list\do{%
+\ifthenelse{\equal{#2}{}}{}{#3}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\forallglsentries}
+% To iterate through all glossary entries over all glossaries listed
+% in the optional argument (the default is all glossaries) use:\\[10pt] 
+% \cmdname{forallglsentries}\oarg{glossary list}\marg{cmd}\marg{code}\\[10pt]
+% Within \cmdname{forallglsentries}, the current glossary type
+% is given by \cmdname{@@this@glo@}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\forallglsentries}[3][\@glo@types]{%
+\expandafter\forallglossaries\expandafter[#1]{\@@this@glo@}{%
+\forglsentries[\@@this@glo@]{#2}{#3}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\ifglossaryexists}
+% To check to see if a glossary exists use:\\[10pt]
+%\cmdname{ifglossaryexists}\marg{type}\marg{true-text}\marg{false-text}\\[10pt]
+%where \meta{type} is the glossary's label.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\ifglossaryexists}[3]{%
+\@ifundefined{@glotype@#1@out}{#3}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\ifglsentryexists}
+% To check to see if a glossary entry has been defined use:\\[10pt]
+% \cmdname{ifglsentryexists}\marg{label}\marg{true text}\marg{false text}\\[10pt]
+%where \meta{label} is the entry's label.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\ifglsentryexists}[3]{%
+\@ifundefined{glo@#1@name}{#3}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\ifglsused}
+% To determine if given glossary entry has been 
+% used in the document text yet use:\\[10pt]
+% \cmdname{ifglsused}\marg{label}\marg{true text}\marg{false text}\\[10pt]
+% where \meta{label} is the entry's label.
+% If true it will do \meta{true text}
+% otherwise it will do \meta{false text}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\ifglsused}[3]{\ifthenelse{\boolean{glo@#1@flag}}{#2}{#3}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%The following two commands will cause an error if the given
+% condition fails:
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\glsdoifexists}
+%\cmdname{glsdoifexists}\marg{label}\marg{code}\par
+% Generate an error if entry specified by \meta{label} doesn't 
+% exists, otherwise do \meta{code}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\glsdoifexists}[2]{\ifglsentryexists{#1}{#2}{%
+\PackageError{glossaries}{Glossary entry `#1' has not been
+defined.}{You need to define a glossary entry before you
+can use it.}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\glsdoifnoexists}
+%\cmdname{glsdoifnoexists}\marg{label}\marg{code}\par
+% The opposite: only do second argument if the entry doesn't
+% exists. Generate an error message if it exists.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\glsdoifnoexists}[2]{\ifglsentryexists{#1}{%
+\PackageError{glossaries}{Glossary entry `#1' has already
+been defined.}{}}{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\subsection{Defining new glossaries}\label{sec:newglos}
+%\DescribeMacro{\@glo@types}
+% A comma-separated list of glossary names is stored
+% in \cmdname{@glo@types}. When a new glossary type
+% is created, its identifying name is added to this list.
+% This is used by commands that iterate through all glossaries
+% (such as \icmdname{makeglossaries} and \icmdname{printglossaries}.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@glo@types}{,}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\newglossary}
+% A new glossary type is defined using \cmdname{newglossary}.
+% Syntax:\\[10pt]\cmdname{newglossary}\oarg{log-ext}\marg{name}\marg{in-ext}\marg{out-ext}%
+%\marg{title}\oarg{counter}\\[10pt]%
+% where \meta{log-ext} is the extension of the \appname{makeindex}
+% transcript file, \meta{in-ext} is the extension of the glossary 
+% input file (read in by \icmdname{printglossary} and created by
+% \appname{makeindex}), \meta{out-ext} is the extension of the
+% glossary output file which is read in by \appname{makeindex} 
+% (lines are written to this file by the \icmdname{glossary} command),
+% \meta{title} is the title of the glossary that is used in
+% \icmdname{glossarysection} and
+% \meta{counter} is the default counter to be used by entries
+% belonging to this glossary. The \appname{makeglossaries} Perl
+% script reads in the relevant extensions from the auxiliary file,
+% and passes the appropriate file names and switches to 
+% \appname{makeindex}.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\newglossary}[5][glg]{%
+\ifglossaryexists{#2}{%
+\PackageError{glossaries}{Glossary type `#2' already exists}{%
+You can't define a new glossary called `#2' because it already
+exists}%
+}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Add this to the list of glossary types:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\toks@{#2}\edef\@glo@types{\@glo@types\the\toks@,}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Define a comma-separated list of labels for this glossary type, 
+% so that all the entries for this glossary can be reset with a 
+% single command. When a new entry is created, its label is added
+% to this list.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\gdef\csname glolist@#2\endcsname{,}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Store details of this new glossary type:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\def\csname @glotype@#2@in\endcsname{#3}%
+\expandafter\def\csname @glotype@#2@out\endcsname{#4}%
+\expandafter\def\csname @glotype@#2@title\endcsname{#5}%
+\protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\@newglossary{#2}{#1}{#3}{#4}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% How to display this entry in the document text (uses
+% \cmdname{glsdisplay} and \cmdname{glsdisplayfirst} by
+% default). These can be redefined by the user later if required
+% (see \icmdname{defglsdisplay} and \icmdname{defglsdisplayfirst})
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\gdef\csname gls@#2@display\endcsname{%
+\glsdisplay}%
+\expandafter\gdef\csname gls@#2@displayfirst\endcsname{%
+\glsdisplayfirst}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Find out if the final optional argument has been specified, and
+% use it to set the counter associated with this glossary. (Uses
+% \icmdname{glscounter} if no optional argument is present.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifnextchar[{\@gls@setcounter{#2}}{\@gls@setcounter{#2}[\glscounter]}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Only defined new glossaries in the preamble:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@onlypreamble{\newglossary}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\DescribeMacro{\@newglossary}
+%\cmdname{@newglossary} is used to specify the file extensions
+% for the \appname{makeindex} input, output and transcript files.
+% It is written to the auxiliary file by \icmdname{newglossary}.
+% Since it is not used by \LaTeX, \cmdname{@newglossary} simply
+% ignores its arguments.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@newglossary}[4]{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\DescribeMacro{\@gls@setcounter}
+% Store counter to be used for given glossary type (the first
+% argument is the glossary label, the second argument is the name 
+% of the counter):
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@gls@setcounter#1[#2]{%
+\expandafter\def\csname @glotype@#1@counter\endcsname{#2}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\DescribeMacro{\@gls@getcounter}
+% Get counter associated with given glossary (the argument is
+% the glossary label):
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@gls@getcounter}[1]{%
+\csname @glotype@#1@counter\endcsname}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Define the main glossary. This will be the first glossary to
+% be displayed when using \icmdname{printglossaries}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newglossary{main}{gls}{glo}{\glossaryname}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\subsection{Defining new entries}\label{sec:newentry}
+% New glossary entries are defined using \cmdname{newglossaryentry}.
+% This command requires a label and a key-value list that defines
+% the relevant information for that entry. The definition for these
+% keys follows. Note that the \gloskey{name},
+% \gloskey{description} and \gloskey{symbol} keys will be
+% sanitized later, depending on the value of the package option
+% \pkgopt{sanitize} (this means that if some of the keys haven't
+% been defined, they can be constructed from the \gloskey{name}
+% and \gloskey{description} key before they are sanitized).
+%
+%The \gloskey{name} key indicates the name
+% of the term being defined. This is how the term will appear in
+% the glossary. The \gloskey{name} key is required when defining
+% a new glossary entry.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{glossentry}{name}{%
+\def\@glo@name{#1}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The \gloskey{description} key is usually only used in
+% the glossary, but can be made to appear in the text by redefining
+% \icmdname{glsdisplay} and \icmdname{glsdisplayfirst} (or
+% using \icmdname{defglsdisplay} and \icmdname{defglsdisplayfirst}), however,
+% you will have to disable the sanitize option (using the 
+% \pkgopt{sanitize} package option, 
+% "sanitize={description=false}", and protect fragile
+% commands.) The \gloskey{description} key is required when
+% defining a new glossary entry. (Be careful not to make the
+% description too long, because \appname{makeindex} has a limited
+% buffer. \cmdname{@glo@desc} is defined to be a short command 
+% to discourage lengthy descriptions
+% for this reason. If you do have a very long description, or if
+% you require paragraph breaks, define a separate command that 
+% contains the description, and use it as the value to the 
+% \gloskey{description} key.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{glossentry}{description}{%
+\def\@glo@desc{#1}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The \gloskey{sort} key needs to be sanitized here 
+% (the sort key is provided for \appname{makeindex}'s benefit, 
+% not for use in the document.) The \gloskey{sort} key is optional
+% when defining a new glossary entry. If omitted, the value 
+% is given by \meta{name} \meta{description}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{glossentry}{sort}{%
+\def\@glo@sort{#1}%
+\@onelevel@sanitize\@glo@sort}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The \gloskey{text} key determines how the term should appear when
+% used in the document (i.e.\ outside of the glossary). If omitted, 
+% the value of the \gloskey{name} key is used instead.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{glossentry}{text}{%
+\def\@glo@text{#1}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The \gloskey{plural} key determines how the plural form of the term
+% should be displayed in the document. If omitted, the plural is
+% constructed by appending an ``s'' to the value of the \gloskey{text}
+% key.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{glossentry}{plural}{%
+\def\@glo@plural{#1}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The \gloskey{first} key determines how the entry should be displayed
+% in the document when it is first used. If omitted, it is taken
+% to be the same as the value of the \gloskey{text} key.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{glossentry}{first}{%
+\def\@glo@first{#1}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The \gloskey{firstplural} key is used to set the plural form for
+% first use, in the event that the plural is required the first 
+% time the term is used. If omitted, it is constructed by 
+% appending an ``s'' to the value of the \gloskey{first} key.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{glossentry}{firstplural}{%
+\def\@glo@firstplural{#1}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The \gloskey{symbol} key is ignored by most of the predefined
+% glossary styles, and defaults to \cmdname{relax} if omitted. 
+% It is provided for glossary styles that require an associated 
+% symbol, as well as a name and description. To make this value 
+% appear in the glossary, you need to redefine 
+% \icmdname{glossaryentryfield} so that it uses its fourth parameter.
+% If you want this value to appear in the text when the term is used 
+% by commands like \icmdname{gls}, you will need to change
+% \icmdname{glsdisplay} and \icmdname{glsdisplayfirst} (either 
+% explicitly for all glossaries or via \icmdname{defglsdisplay}
+% and \icmdname{defglsdisplayfirst} for individual glossaries.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{glossentry}{symbol}{%
+\def\@glo@symbol{#1}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The \gloskey{type} key specifies to which glossary this
+% entry belongs. If omitted, the default glossary is used.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{glossentry}{type}{%
+\def\@glo@type{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The \gloskey{counter} key specifies the name of the counter 
+% associated with this glossary entry:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{glossentry}{counter}{%
+\@ifundefined{c@#1}{\PackageError{glossaries}{There is no counter
+called `#1'}{The counter key should have the name of a valid 
+counter as its value}}{%
+\def\@glo@counter{#1}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\newglossaryentry}
+% Define \cmdname{newglossaryentry}%
+% \marg{label} \marg{key-val list}. 
+% There are two required fields in \meta{key-val list}: 
+% \gloskey{name} and 
+% \gloskey{description}. (See above.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\newglossaryentry}[2]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Check to see if this glossary entry has already been defined:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\glsdoifnoexists{#1}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Set up defaults. If the \gloskey{name} or \gloskey{description}
+% keys are omitted, an error will be generated.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@glo@name{\PackageError{glossaries}{name key required in 
+\string\newglossaryentry}{You haven't specified the entry name}}%
+\def\@glo@desc{\PackageError{glossaries}{desc key required in 
+\string\newglossaryentry}{You haven't specified the entry description}}%
+\def\@glo@type{\glsdefaulttype}%
+\def\@glo@symbol{\relax}%
+\def\@glo@text{\@glo@name}%
+\def\@glo@plural{\@glo@text s}%
+\def\@glo@first{\@glo@text}%
+\def\@glo@firstplural{\@glo@plural}%
+\def\@glo@sort{\@glo@name\space\@glo@desc}%
+\def\@glo@counter{\@gls@getcounter{\@glo@type}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Extract key-val information from third parameter:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setkeys{glossentry}{#2}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Check to see if this glossary type has been defined, if it has,
+% add this label to the relevant list, otherwise generate an error.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{glolist@\@glo@type}{\PackageError{glossaries}{%
+Glossary type '\@glo@type' has not been defined}{%
+You need to define a new glossary type, before making entries
+in it}}{%
+\protected@edef\@glolist@{\csname glolist@\@glo@type\endcsname}%
+\expandafter\xdef\csname glolist@\@glo@type\endcsname{\@glolist@{#1},}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Define commands associated with this entry:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@text\endcsname{\@glo@text}%
+\expandafter\protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@plural\endcsname{\@glo@plural}%
+\expandafter\protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@first\endcsname{\@glo@first}%
+\expandafter\protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@firstpl\endcsname{\@glo@firstplural}%
+\expandafter\protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@type\endcsname{\@glo@type}%
+\expandafter\protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@counter\endcsname{\@glo@counter}%
+\@gls@sanitizename
+\expandafter\protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@name\endcsname{\@glo@name}%
+\@gls@sanitizedesc
+\expandafter\protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@desc\endcsname{\@glo@desc}%
+\expandafter\protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@sort\endcsname{\@glo@sort}%
+\@gls@sanitizesymbol
+\expandafter\protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@symbol\endcsname{\@glo@symbol}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Define an associated boolean variable to determine whether this
+% entry has been used yet (needs to be defined globally):
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\gdef\csname glo@#1@flagfalse\endcsname{%
+\expandafter\global\expandafter
+\let\csname ifglo@#1@flag\endcsname\iffalse}
+\expandafter\gdef\csname glo@#1@flagtrue\endcsname{%
+\expandafter\global\expandafter
+\let\csname ifglo@#1@flag\endcsname\iftrue}
+\csname glo@#1@flagfalse\endcsname
+}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Only defined new glossary entries in the preamble:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@onlypreamble{\newglossaryentry}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\subsection{Resetting and unsetting entry flags}
+% Each glossary entry is assigned a conditional of the form
+%\cmdname{ifglo@}\meta{label}\texttt{@flag} which determines
+% whether or not the entry has been used (see also 
+% \icmdname{ifglsused} defined below.) These flags can
+% be set and unset using the following macros:
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\glsreset}
+% The command \cmdname{glsreset}\marg{label} can be used
+% to set the entry flag to indicate that it hasn't been used yet. The
+% required argument is the entry label.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glsreset}[1]{%
+\glsdoifexists{#1}{%
+\expandafter\global\csname glo@#1@flagfalse\endcsname}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\DescribeMacro{\glslocalreset}
+% As above, but with only a local effect:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glslocalreset}[1]{%
+\glsdoifexists{#1}{%
+\expandafter\let\csname ifglo@#1@flag\endcsname\iffalse}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\DescribeMacro{\glsunset}
+% The command \cmdname{glsunset}\marg{label} can be used to
+% set the entry flag to indicate that it has been used. The required
+% argument is the entry label.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glsunset}[1]{%
+\glsdoifexists{#1}{%
+\expandafter\global\csname glo@#1@flagtrue\endcsname}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\DescribeMacro{\glslocalunset}
+% As above, but with only a local effect:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glslocalunset}[1]{%
+\glsdoifexists{#1}{%
+\expandafter\let\csname ifglo@#1@flag\endcsname\iftrue}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\DescribeMacro{\glsresetall}
+% Reset all entries for the named glossaries (supplied in a 
+% comma-separated list). 
+% Syntax: \cmdname{glsresetall}\oarg{glossary-list}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glsresetall}[1][\@glo@types]{%
+\forallglsentries[#1]{\@glsentry}{%
+\glsreset{\@glsentry}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\DescribeMacro{\glslocalresetall}
+% As above, but with only a local effect:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glslocalresetall}[1][\@glo@types]{%
+\forallglsentries[#1]{\@glsentry}{%
+\glslocalreset{\@glsentry}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\DescribeMacro{\glsunsetall}
+% Unset all entries for the named glossaries (supplied in a 
+% comma-separated list). 
+% Syntax: \cmdname{glsunsetall}\oarg{glossary-list}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glsunsetall}[1][\@glo@types]{%
+\forallglsentries[#1]{\@glsentry}{%
+\glsunset{\@glsentry}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\DescribeMacro{\glslocalunsetall}
+% As above, but with only a local effect:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glslocalunsetall}[1][\@glo@types]{%
+\forallglsentries[#1]{\@glsentry}{%
+\glslocalunset{\@glsentry}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Loading files containing glossary entries}
+%\label{sec:load}
+% Glossary entries can be defined in an external file.
+% These external files can contain \icmdname{newglossaryentry}
+% and \icmdname{newacronym} commands.\footnote{and any other valid 
+%\LaTeX\ code that can be used in the preamble.}\\[10pt]
+%\DescribeMacro{\loadglsentries}
+% \cmdname{loadglsentries}\oarg{type}\marg{filename}\\[10pt]
+% This command will input the file using \cmdname{input}.
+% The optional argument specifies to which glossary the
+% entries should be assigned if they haven't used the \gloskey{type}
+% key. If the optional argument is not specified, the default
+% glossary is used. Only those entries used in the document (via
+% \icmdname{glslink}, \icmdname{gls}, \icmdname{glspl} and uppercase
+% variants or \icmdname{glsadd} and \icmdname{glsaddall} 
+% will appear in the glossary.) The mandatory argument is 
+% the filename (with or without .tex extension.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\loadglsentries}[2][\@gls@default]{%
+\let\@gls@default\glsdefaulttype
+\def\glsdefaulttype{#1}\input{#2}%
+\let\glsdefaulttype\@gls@default}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \cmdname{loadglsentries} can only be used in the preamble:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@onlypreamble{\loadglsentries}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\subsection{Using glossary entries in the text}
+%
+% Any term that has been defined using \icmdname{newglossaryentry}
+% (or \icmdname{newacronym}) can be displayed in the text 
+% (i.e.\ outside of the glossary) using
+% one of the commands defined in this section. Unless you use
+% \icmdname{glslink}, the way the term appears in the text is
+% determined by \icmdname{glsdisplayfirst} (if it is the first
+% time the term has been used) or \icmdname{glsdisplay} (for
+% subsequent use.)
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\glsdisplayfirst}
+% The first time an entry is used, the way in which it is
+% displayed is governed by \cmdname{glsdisplayfirst}. This
+% takes four parameters: \verb|#1| will be the value
+% of the entry's \gloskey{first} or \gloskey{firstplural} key, 
+% \verb|#2| will be the value of the entry's \gloskey{description}
+% key, \verb|#3| will be the value of the entry's \gloskey{symbol}
+% key and \verb|#4| is additional text supplied by the final optional
+% argument to commands like \icmdname{gls} and \icmdname{glspl}.
+% The default is to display the first parameter followed by the
+% additional text.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glsdisplayfirst}[4]{#1#4}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\glsdisplay}
+% After the first use, the entry is displayed according to
+% the format of \cmdname{glsdisplay}. Again, it takes four
+% parameters: \verb|#1| will be the value of the
+% entry's \gloskey{text} or \gloskey{plural} key, 
+% \verb|#2| will be the value of the entry's \gloskey{description} 
+% key, \verb|#3| will be the value of the entry's \gloskey{symbol}
+% key and \verb|#4| is additional text supplied by the final optional
+% argument to commands like \icmdname{gls} and \icmdname{glspl}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glsdisplay}[4]{#1#4}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% When a new glossary is created it uses \cmdname{glsdisplayfirst}
+% and \cmdname{glsdisplay} as the default way of displaying its
+% entry in the text. This can be changed for the entries belonging 
+% to an individual glossary using 
+% \icmdname{defglsdisplay} and \icmdname{defglsdisplayfirst}.
+%\\[10pt]
+%\DescribeMacro{\defglsdisplay}
+% \cmdname{defglsdisplay}\oarg{type}\marg{definition}\\[10pt]%
+% The glossary type is given by \meta{type} (the default glossary
+% if omitted) and
+% \meta{definition} should have at most \verb|#1|, \verb|#2|,
+% \verb|#3| and \verb|#4|. These represent the same arguments
+% as those described for \icmdname{glsdisplay}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\defglsdisplay}[2][\glsdefaulttype]{%
+\expandafter\def\csname gls@#1@display\endcsname##1##2##3##4{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\vskip5pt
+%\DescribeMacro{\defglsdisplayfirst}
+% \cmdname{defglsdisplayfirst}\oarg{type}\marg{definition}\\[10pt]%
+% The glossary type is given by \meta{type} (the default glossary
+% if omitted) and
+% \meta{definition} should have at most \verb|#1|, \verb|#2|,
+% \verb|#3| and \verb|#4|. These represent the same arguments
+% as those described for \icmdname{glsdisplayfirst}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\defglsdisplayfirst}[2][\glsdefaulttype]{%
+\expandafter\def\csname gls@#1@displayfirst\endcsname##1##2##3##4{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\subsubsection{Links to glossary entries}
+% The links to glossary entries all have a first optional 
+% argument that can be used to change the format and counter
+% of the associated entry number. Except for \cmdname{glslink},
+% the commands like \cmdname{gls} have a final optional
+% argument that can be used to insert additional text in the
+% link (this will usually be appended, but can be redefined using
+% \icmdname{defglsdisplay} and \icmdname{defglsdisplayfirst}). 
+% It goes against the \LaTeX\ norm to have an optional
+% argument after the mandatory arguments, but it makes more
+% sense to write, say, \verb|\gls{label}['s]| rather than, say,
+% \verb|\gls[append='s]{label}|. Since these control sequences
+% are defined to include the final square bracket, spaces
+% will be ignored after them. This is likely to lead to
+% confusion as most users would not expect, say, "\gls{"\meta{label}"}"
+% to ignore following spaces, so \icmdname{xspace} is used.
+%
+% The following keys can be used in the first optional 
+% argument. The \gloskey[glslink]{counter} key checks that the 
+% value is the name of a valid counter.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{glslink}{counter}{%
+\@ifundefined{c@#1}{\PackageError{glossaries}{There is no counter
+called `#1'}{The counter key should have the name of a valid 
+counter as its value}}{%
+\def\@gls@counter{#1}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The value of the \gloskey[glslink]{format} key should be the name of a 
+% command (without the initial backslash) that has a single mandatory 
+% argument which can be used to format the associated entry
+% number.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{glslink}{format}{%
+\def\@glsnumberformat{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \gloskey[glslink]{hyper} key is a boolean key, it can either have the 
+% value true or false, and indicates whether or not to make a 
+% hyperlink to the relevant glossary entry. If hyper is false, an 
+% entry will still be made in the glossary, but the given text 
+% won't be a hyperlink.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@boolkey{glslink}{hyper}[true]{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\glslink}
+%Syntax:\\[10pt]
+% \cmdname{glslink}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\marg{text}
+%\\[10pt]
+% Display \meta{text} in the document, and add the entry information
+% for \meta{label} into the relevant glossary. The optional
+% argument should be a key value list using the \texttt{glslink}
+% keys defined above.
+%
+% There is also a starred version:\DescribeMacro{\glslink*}\\[10pt]
+% \cmdname{glslink*}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\marg{text}\\[10pt]
+% which is equivalent to 
+% \cmdname{glslink}"[hyper=false,"\meta{options}"]"\marg{label}\marg{text}
+%
+% First determine whether or not we are using the starred version:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\glslink}{%
+\@ifstar\@sgls@link\@gls@link}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Define the starred version:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@sgls@link}[1][]{\@gls@link[hyper=false,#1]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Define the un-starred version:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@gls@link}[3][]{%
+\glsdoifexists{#2}{%
+\def\@glsnumberformat{glsnumberformat}%
+\edef\@gls@counter{\csname glo@#2@counter\endcsname}%
+\KV@glslink@hypertrue
+\setkeys{glslink}{#1}%
+\edef\theglsentrycounter{\csname the\@gls@counter\endcsname}%
+\ifKV@glslink@hyper
+\@glslink{glo:#2}{#3}%
+\else
+#3\relax
+\fi
+\protected@edef\@glo@sort{\csname glo@#2@sort\endcsname}%
+\@gls@checkmkidxchars\@glo@sort
+\protected@edef\@@glo@name{\csname glo@#2@name\endcsname}%
+\@gls@checkmkidxchars\@@glo@name
+\protected@edef\@glo@name{\string\glsnamefont{\@@glo@name}}%
+\protected@edef\@glo@desc{\csname glo@#2@desc\endcsname}%
+\@gls@checkmkidxchars\@glo@desc
+\protected@edef\@glo@symbol{\csname glo@#2@symbol\endcsname}%
+\@gls@checkmkidxchars\@glo@symbol
+\protected@edef\@glo@numfmt{setentrycounter{\@gls@counter}%
+\expandafter\string\csname\@glsnumberformat\endcsname}%
+\@gls@checkmkidxchars\@glo@numfmt
+\glossary[\csname glo@#2@type\endcsname]{%
+\@glo@sort\@gls@actualchar
+\string\glossaryentryfield{#2}{\@glo@name}{\@glo@desc
+}{\@glo@symbol}\@gls@encapchar\@glo@numfmt}%
+}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Catch \appname{makeindex} special characters\mkidxspch:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@gls@checkmkidxchars}[1]{%
+\def\@gls@checkedmkidx{}%
+\expandafter\@gls@checkquote#1\@nil""\null%
+\expandafter\@gls@updatechecked\@gls@checkedmkidx{#1}%
+\def\@gls@checkedmkidx{}%
+\expandafter\@gls@checkescquote#1\@nil\"\"\null%
+\expandafter\@gls@updatechecked\@gls@checkedmkidx{#1}%
+\def\@gls@checkedmkidx{}%
+\expandafter\@gls@checkescactual#1\@nil\?\?\null%
+\expandafter\@gls@updatechecked\@gls@checkedmkidx{#1}%
+\def\@gls@checkedmkidx{}%
+\expandafter\@gls@checkactual#1\@nil??\null%
+\expandafter\@gls@updatechecked\@gls@checkedmkidx{#1}%
+\def\@gls@checkedmkidx{}%
+\expandafter\@gls@checkbar#1\@nil||\null%
+\expandafter\@gls@updatechecked\@gls@checkedmkidx{#1}%
+\def\@gls@checkedmkidx{}%
+\expandafter\@gls@checkescbar#1\@nil\|\|\null%
+\expandafter\@gls@updatechecked\@gls@checkedmkidx{#1}%
+\def\@gls@checkedmkidx{}%
+\expandafter\@gls@checklevel#1\@nil!!\null%
+\expandafter\@gls@updatechecked\@gls@checkedmkidx{#1}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Update the control sequence and strip trailing \cmdname{@nil}:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@gls@updatechecked#1\@nil#2{\def#2{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Replace \verb|"| with \verb|""| since \verb|"| is a makeindex
+% special character\mkidxspch.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\toksdef\@gls@tmpb=2
+\def\@gls@checkquote#1"#2"#3\null{%
+\@gls@tmpb=\expandafter{\@gls@checkedmkidx}%
+\toks@={#1}%
+\ifx\null#2\null%
+ \ifx\null#3\null
+  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@}%
+  \def\@@gls@checkquote{\relax}%
+ \else
+  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
+    \@gls@quotechar\@gls@quotechar\@gls@quotechar\@gls@quotechar}%
+  \def\@@gls@checkquote{\@gls@checkquote#3\null}%
+ \fi
+\else
+ \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
+   \@gls@quotechar\@gls@quotechar}%
+ \ifx\null#3\null
+   \def\@@gls@checkquote{\@gls@checkquote#2""\null}%
+ \else
+   \def\@@gls@checkquote{\@gls@checkquote#2"#3\null}%
+ \fi
+\fi
+\@@gls@checkquote}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Do the same for \verb|\"|:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@gls@checkescquote#1\"#2\"#3\null{%
+\@gls@tmpb=\expandafter{\@gls@checkedmkidx}%
+\toks@={#1}%
+\ifx\null#2\null%
+ \ifx\null#3\null
+  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@}%
+  \def\@@gls@checkescquote{\relax}%
+ \else
+  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
+    \@gls@quotechar\string\"\@gls@quotechar
+    \@gls@quotechar\string\"\@gls@quotechar}%
+  \def\@@gls@checkescquote{\@gls@checkescquote#3\null}%
+ \fi
+\else
+ \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
+   \@gls@quotechar\string\"\@gls@quotechar}%
+ \ifx\null#3\null
+   \def\@@gls@checkescquote{\@gls@checkescquote#2\"\"\null}%
+ \else
+   \def\@@gls@checkescquote{\@gls@checkescquote#2\"#3\null}%
+ \fi
+\fi
+\@@gls@checkescquote}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Similarly for \verb|\?| (which is replaces @ as 
+% \appname{makeindex}'s special character):
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@gls@checkescactual#1\?#2\?#3\null{%
+\@gls@tmpb=\expandafter{\@gls@checkedmkidx}%
+\toks@={#1}%
+\ifx\null#2\null%
+ \ifx\null#3\null
+  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@}%
+  \def\@@gls@checkescactual{\relax}%
+ \else
+  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
+    \@gls@quotechar\string\"\@gls@actualchar
+    \@gls@quotechar\string\"\@gls@actualchar}%
+  \def\@@gls@checkescactual{\@gls@checkescactual#3\null}%
+ \fi
+\else
+ \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
+   \@gls@quotechar\string\"\@gls@actualchar}%
+ \ifx\null#3\null
+  \def\@@gls@checkescactual{\@gls@checkescactual#2\?\?\null}%
+ \else
+  \def\@@gls@checkescactual{\@gls@checkescactual#2\?#3\null}%
+ \fi
+\fi
+\@@gls@checkescactual}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Similarly for \verb"\|":
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@gls@checkescbar#1\|#2\|#3\null{%
+\@gls@tmpb=\expandafter{\@gls@checkedmkidx}%
+\toks@={#1}%
+\ifx\null#2\null%
+ \ifx\null#3\null
+  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@}%
+  \def\@@gls@checkescbar{\relax}%
+ \else
+  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
+    \@gls@quotechar\string\"\@gls@encapchar
+    \@gls@quotechar\string\"\@gls@encapchar}%
+  \def\@@gls@checkescbar{\@gls@checkescbar#3\null}%
+ \fi
+\else
+ \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
+   \@gls@quotechar\string\"\@gls@encapchar}%
+ \ifx\null#3\null
+  \def\@@gls@checkescbar{\@gls@checkescbar#2\|\|\null}%
+ \else
+  \def\@@gls@checkescbar{\@gls@checkescbar#2\|#3\null}%
+ \fi
+\fi
+\@@gls@checkescbar}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Similarly for \verb"\!":
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@gls@checkesclevel#1\!#2\!#3\null{%
+\@gls@tmpb=\expandafter{\@gls@checkedmkidx}%
+\toks@={#1}%
+\ifx\null#2\null%
+ \ifx\null#3\null
+  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@}%
+  \def\@@gls@checkesclevel{\relax}%
+ \else
+  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
+    \@gls@quotechar\string\"\@gls@levelchar
+    \@gls@quotechar\string\"\@gls@levelchar}%
+  \def\@@gls@checkesclevel{\@gls@checkesclevel#3\null}%
+ \fi
+\else
+ \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
+   \@gls@quotechar\string\"\@gls@levelchar}%
+ \ifx\null#3\null
+  \def\@@gls@checkesclevel{\@gls@checkesclevel#2\!\!\null}%
+ \else
+  \def\@@gls@checkesclevel{\@gls@checkesclevel#2\!#3\null}%
+ \fi
+\fi
+\@@gls@checkesclevel}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% and for \verb"|":
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@gls@checkbar#1|#2|#3\null{%
+\@gls@tmpb=\expandafter{\@gls@checkedmkidx}%
+\toks@={#1}%
+\ifx\null#2\null%
+ \ifx\null#3\null
+  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@}%
+  \def\@@gls@checkbar{\relax}%
+ \else
+  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
+    \@gls@quotechar\@gls@encapchar\@gls@quotechar\@gls@encapchar}%
+  \def\@@gls@checkbar{\@gls@checkbar#3\null}%
+ \fi
+\else
+ \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
+   \@gls@quotechar\@gls@encapchar}%
+ \ifx\null#3\null
+   \def\@@gls@checkbar{\@gls@checkbar#2||\null}%
+ \else
+   \def\@@gls@checkbar{\@gls@checkbar#2|#3\null}%
+ \fi
+\fi
+\@@gls@checkbar}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% and for \verb"!":
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@gls@checklevel#1!#2!#3\null{%
+\@gls@tmpb=\expandafter{\@gls@checkedmkidx}%
+\toks@={#1}%
+\ifx\null#2\null%
+ \ifx\null#3\null
+  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@}%
+  \def\@@gls@checklevel{\relax}%
+ \else
+  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
+    \@gls@quotechar\@gls@levelchar\@gls@quotechar\@gls@levelchar}%
+  \def\@@gls@checklevel{\@gls@checklevel#3\null}%
+ \fi
+\else
+ \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
+   \@gls@quotechar\@gls@levelchar}%
+ \ifx\null#3\null
+   \def\@@gls@checklevel{\@gls@checklevel#2!!\null}%
+ \else
+   \def\@@gls@checklevel{\@gls@checklevel#2!#3\null}%
+ \fi
+\fi
+\@@gls@checklevel}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% and for \verb"?":
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@gls@checkactual#1?#2?#3\null{%
+\@gls@tmpb=\expandafter{\@gls@checkedmkidx}%
+\toks@={#1}%
+\ifx\null#2\null%
+ \ifx\null#3\null
+  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@}%
+  \def\@@gls@checkactual{\relax}%
+ \else
+  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
+    \@gls@quotechar\@gls@actualchar\@gls@quotechar\@gls@actualchar}%
+  \def\@@gls@checkactual{\@gls@checkactual#3\null}%
+ \fi
+\else
+ \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
+   \@gls@quotechar\@gls@actualchar}%
+ \ifx\null#3\null
+   \def\@@gls@checkactual{\@gls@checkactual#2??\null}%
+ \else
+   \def\@@gls@checkactual{\@gls@checkactual#2?#3\null}%
+ \fi
+\fi
+\@@gls@checkactual}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\@glslink}\DescribeMacro{\@glstarget}
+% If \icmdname{hyperlink}
+% is not defined, \cmdname{@glslink} and \cmdname{@glstarget}
+% ignore their first argument, and just do the second argument,
+% otherwise they are equivalent to \icmdname{hyperlink} and
+%\icmdname{hypertarget}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{hyperlink}{%
+\gdef\@glslink#1#2{#2}\gdef\@glstarget#1#2{#2}%
+}{\gdef\@glslink#1#2{\hyperlink{#1}{#2}}%
+\gdef\@glstarget#1#2{\hypertarget{#1}{#2}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\glsdisablehyper}
+% Glossary hyperlinks can be disabled using \cmdname{glsdisablehyper}
+% (effect can be localised):
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\glsdisablehyper}{%
+\renewcommand*\@glslink[2]{##2}%
+\renewcommand*\@glstarget[2]{##2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\DescribeMacro{\glsenablehyper}
+% Glossary hyperlinks can be enabled using \cmdname{glsenablehyper}
+% (effect can be localised):
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\glsenablehyper}{%
+\renewcommand*\@glslink[2]{\hyperlink{##1}{##2}}%
+\renewcommand*\@glstarget[2]{\hypertarget{##1}{##2}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\gls}
+%Syntax:\\[10pt]
+% \cmdname{gls}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\oarg{insert text}\\[10pt]
+% Link to glossary entry using singular form. The link text
+% is taken from the value of the \gloskey{text} or \gloskey{first}
+% keys used when the entry was defined.
+%
+%  The first optional argument is a key-value list, the same as
+% \icmdname{glslink}\igloskey[glslink]{hyper}\igloskey[glslink]{format}\igloskey[glslink]{counter}, 
+% the mandatory argument is the entry label. 
+% After the mandatory argument, there is another optional argument 
+% to insert extra text in the link text (the location of the inserted
+% text is governed by \icmdname{glsdisplay} and 
+% \icmdname{glsdisplayfirst}). As with \cmdname{glslink}
+% there is a starred version which is the same as the unstarred 
+% version but with the \gloskey[glslink]{hyper} key set to \texttt{false}.
+% (Additional options can also be specified 
+% in the first optional argument.)
+%
+% First determine if we are using the starred form:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\gls}{\@ifstar\@sgls\@gls}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Define the starred form:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@sgls}[1][]{\@gls[hyper=false,#1]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
+% a final optional argument
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@gls}[2][]{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\@gls@{#1}{#2}}{\@gls@{#1}{#2}[]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Read in the final optional argument:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@gls@#1#2[#3]{%
+\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
+% \cmdname{@glo@text})
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifglsused{#2}{\protected@edef\@glo@text{%
+\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname
+{\glsentrytext{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}{%
+\protected@edef\@glo@text{%
+\csname gls@\@glo@type @displayfirst\endcsname
+{\glsentryfirst{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Call \cmdname{@gls@link}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Indicate that this entry has now been used, and add a space if
+% appropriate
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\glsunset{#2}}%
+\xspace}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\Gls}
+% \cmdname{Gls} behaves like \cmdname{gls}, but the first letter
+% of the link text is converted to uppercase (note that if the
+% first letter has an accent, the accented letter will need to
+% be grouped when you define the entry.) It is mainly intended
+% for terms that start a sentence:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\Gls}{\@ifstar\@sGls\@Gls}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Define the starred form:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@sGls}[1][]{\@Gls[hyper=false,#1]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
+% a final optional argument
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@Gls}[2][]{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\@Gls@{#1}{#2}}{\@Gls@{#1}{#2}[]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Read in the final optional argument:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@Gls@#1#2[#3]{%
+\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
+% \cmdname{@glo@text})
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifglsused{#2}{\protected@edef\@glo@text{%
+\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname
+{\glsentrytext{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}{%
+\protected@edef\@glo@text{%
+\csname gls@\@glo@type @displayfirst\endcsname
+{\glsentryfirst{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Call \cmdname{@gls@link}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@glo@text}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Indicate that this entry has now been used, and add a space if
+% appropriate
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\glsunset{#2}}%
+\xspace}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\GLS}
+% \cmdname{GLS} behaves like \icmdname{gls}, but the link
+% text is converted to uppercase:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\GLS}{\@ifstar\@sGLS\@GLS}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Define the starred form:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@sGLS}[1][]{\@GLS[hyper=false,#1]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
+% a final optional argument
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@GLS}[2][]{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\@GLS@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLS@{#1}{#2}[]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Read in the final optional argument:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@GLS@#1#2[#3]{%
+\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
+% \cmdname{@glo@text})
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifglsused{#2}{\protected@edef\@glo@text{%
+\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname
+{\glsentrytext{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}{%
+\protected@edef\@glo@text{%
+\csname gls@\@glo@type @displayfirst\endcsname
+{\glsentryfirst{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Call \cmdname{@gls@link}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Indicate that this entry has now been used, and add a space if
+% appropriate
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\glsunset{#2}}%
+\xspace}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\glspl}
+% \cmdname{glspl} behaves in the same way as \icmdname{gls} except
+% it uses the plural form.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glspl}{\@ifstar\@sglspl\@glspl}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Define the starred form:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@sglspl}[1][]{\@glspl[hyper=false,#1]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
+% a final optional argument
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@glspl}[2][]{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\@glspl@{#1}{#2}}{\@glspl@{#1}{#2}[]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Read in the final optional argument:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@glspl@#1#2[#3]{%
+\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
+% \cmdname{@glo@text})
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifglsused{#2}{\protected@edef\@glo@text{%
+\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname
+{\glsentryplural{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}{%
+\protected@edef\@glo@text{%
+\csname gls@\@glo@type @displayfirst\endcsname
+{\glsentryfirstplural{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Call \cmdname{@gls@link}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Indicate that this entry has now been used, and add a space if
+% appropriate
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\glsunset{#2}}%
+\xspace}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\Glspl}
+% \cmdname{Glspl} behaves in the same way as \icmdname{glspl}, except
+% that the first letter of the link text is converted to uppercase
+% (as with \icmdname{Gls}, if the first letter has an accent, it
+% will need to be grouped.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\Glspl}{\@ifstar\@sGlspl\@Glspl}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Define the starred form:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@sGlspl}[1][]{\@Glspl[hyper=false,#1]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
+% a final optional argument
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@Glspl}[2][]{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\@Glspl@{#1}{#2}}{\@Glspl@{#1}{#2}[]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Read in the final optional argument:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@Glspl@#1#2[#3]{%
+\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
+% \cmdname{@glo@text})
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifglsused{#2}{\protected@edef\@glo@text{%
+\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname
+{\glsentryplural{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}{%
+\protected@edef\@glo@text{%
+\csname gls@\@glo@type @displayfirst\endcsname
+{\glsentryfirstplural{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Call \cmdname{@gls@link}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@glo@text}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Indicate that this entry has now been used, and add a space if
+% appropriate
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\glsunset{#2}}%
+\xspace}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\GLSpl}
+% \cmdname{GLSpl} behaves like \icmdname{glspl} except that all the
+% link text is converted to uppercase.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\GLSpl}{\@ifstar\@sGLSpl\@GLSpl}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Define the starred form:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@sGLSpl}[1][]{\@GLSpl[hyper=false,#1]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Defined the un-starred form. Need to determine if there is
+% a final optional argument
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@GLSpl}[2][]{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\@GLSpl@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLSpl@{#1}{#2}[]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Read in the final optional argument:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@GLSpl@#1#2[#3]{%
+\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Determine what the link text should be (this is stored in 
+% \cmdname{@glo@text})
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifglsused{#2}{\protected@edef\@glo@text{%
+\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname
+{\glsentryplural{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}{%
+\protected@edef\@glo@text{%
+\csname gls@\@glo@type @displayfirst\endcsname
+{\glsentryfirstplural{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Call \cmdname{@gls@link}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Indicate that this entry has now been used, and add a space if
+% appropriate
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\glsunset{#2}}%
+\xspace}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Displaying entry details without adding
+% information to the glossary}
+% 
+% These commands merely display entry information without adding
+% entries in the associated file or having hyperlinks.
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\glsentryname}\DescribeMacro{\Glsentryname}
+% Get the entry name (as specified by the \gloskey{name} key
+% when the entry was defined.) The argument
+% is the label associated with the entry. Note that unless you
+% used \texttt{name=false} in the \pkgopt{sanitize} package option 
+% you may get unexpected results if the \gloskey{name} key contained 
+% any commands.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glsentryname}[1]{\csname glo@#1@name\endcsname}
+\newcommand*{\Glsentryname}[1]{\expandafter
+\MakeUppercase\csname glo@#1@name\endcsname}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\glsentrydesc}\DescribeMacro{\Glsentrydesc}
+% Get the entry description (as specified by the 
+% \gloskey{description} when the entry was defined.) The argument
+% is the label associated with the entry. Note that unless you
+% used \texttt{description=false} in the \pkgopt{sanitize} package 
+% option you may get unexpected results if the \gloskey{description} 
+% key contained any commands.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glsentrydesc}[1]{\csname glo@#1@desc\endcsname}
+\newcommand*{\Glsentrydesc}[1]{\expandafter
+\MakeUppercase\csname glo@#1@desc\endcsname}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\glsentrytext}\DescribeMacro{\Glsentrytext}
+% Get the entry text, as specified by the \gloskey{text} key when
+% the entry was defined. The argument
+% is the label associated with the entry:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glsentrytext}[1]{\csname glo@#1@text\endcsname}
+\newcommand*{\Glsentrytext}[1]{\expandafter
+\MakeUppercase\csname glo@#1@text\endcsname}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\glsentryplural}\DescribeMacro{\Glsentryplural}
+% Get the plural form:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glsentryplural}[1]{\csname glo@#1@plural\endcsname}
+\newcommand*{\Glsentryplural}[1]{\expandafter
+\MakeUppercase\csname glo@#1@plural\endcsname}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\glsentrysymbol}\DescribeMacro{\Glsentrysymbol}
+% Get the symbol associated with this entry. The argument
+% is the label associated with the entry. Note that unless you
+% used \texttt{symbol=false} in the \pkgopt{sanitize} package 
+% option you may get unexpected results if the \gloskey{symbol} 
+% key contained any commands.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glsentrysymbol}[1]{\csname glo@#1@symbol\endcsname}
+\newcommand*{\Glsentrysymbol}[1]{\expandafter
+\MakeUppercase\csname glo@#1@symbol\endcsname}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\glsentryfirst}\DescribeMacro{\Glsentryfirst}
+% Get the entry text to be used when the entry is first used in
+% the document (as specified by the \gloskey{first} key when
+% the entry was defined.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glsentryfirst}[1]{\csname glo@#1@first\endcsname}
+\newcommand*{\Glsentryfirst}[1]{\expandafter
+\MakeUppercase\csname glo@#1@first\endcsname}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\glsentryfirstplural}\DescribeMacro{\Glsentryfirstplural}
+% Get the plural form (as specified by the \gloskey{firstplural}
+% key when the entry was defined.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glsentryfirstplural}[1]{%
+\csname glo@#1@firstpl\endcsname}
+\newcommand*{\Glsentryfirstplural}[1]{%
+\expandafter\MakeUppercase\csname glo@#1@firstpl\endcsname}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\glsentrytype}
+% Display the glossary type with which this entry is associated
+% (as specified by the \gloskey{type} key used when the entry was 
+% defined)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glsentrytype}[1]{\csname glo@#1@type\endcsname}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\glsentrysort}
+% Display the sort text used for this entry. Note that the 
+% \gloskey{sort} key is sanitize, so unexpected results may 
+% occur if the \gloskey{sort} key contained commands.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glsentrysort}[1]{\csname glo@#1@sort\endcsname}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\subsection{Adding an entry to the glossary without generating
+% text}
+% The following keys are provided for \cmdname{glsadd} and 
+% \cmdname{glsaddall}:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{glossadd}{counter}{\def\@glo@counter{#1}}
+\define@key{glossadd}{format}{\def\@glo@format{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% This key is only used by \cmdname{glsaddall}:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{glossadd}{types}{\def\@glo@type{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\vskip5pt
+%\DescribeMacro{\glsadd}
+%\cmdname{glsadd}\oarg{options}\marg{label}\\[10pt]
+% Add a term to the glossary without generating any link text. 
+% The optional argument indicates which counter to use, 
+% and how to format it (using a key-value list)
+% the second argument is the entry label. Note that \meta{options}
+% only has two keys: \gloskey[glsadd]{counter} and \gloskey[glsadd]{format} (the \gloskey[glsaddall]{types} key will be ignored).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glsadd}[2][]{%
+\glsdoifexists{#2}{%
+\def\@glo@format{glsnumberformat}%
+\edef\@glo@counter{\csname glo@#2@counter\endcsname}%
+\setkeys{glossadd}{#1}%
+\edef\theglsentrycounter{\csname the\@glo@counter\endcsname}%
+\protected@edef\@glo@sort{\csname glo@#2@sort\endcsname}%
+\@gls@checkmkidxchars\@glo@sort
+\protected@edef\@@glo@name{\csname glo@#2@name\endcsname}%
+\@gls@checkmkidxchars\@@glo@name
+\protected@edef\@glo@name{\string\glsnamefont{\@@glo@name}}%
+\protected@edef\@glo@desc{\csname glo@#2@desc\endcsname}%
+\@gls@checkmkidxchars\@glo@desc
+\protected@edef\@glo@symbol{\csname glo@#2@symbol\endcsname}%
+\@gls@checkmkidxchars\@glo@symbol
+\protected@edef\@glo@numfmt{setentrycounter{\@glo@counter}%
+\expandafter\string\csname\@glo@format\endcsname}%
+\@gls@checkmkidxchars\@glo@numfmt
+\glossary[\csname glo@#2@type\endcsname]{%
+\@glo@sort\@gls@actualchar\string\glossaryentryfield
+{#2}{\@glo@name}{\@glo@desc}{\@glo@symbol}\@gls@encapchar
+\@glo@numfmt}%
+}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\vskip5pt
+%\DescribeMacro{\glsaddall}
+%\cmdname{glsaddall}\oarg{glossary list}\\[10pt]
+% Add all terms defined for the listed glossaries (without displaying
+% any text.) If \gloskey[glsaddall]{types} key is omitted, apply to all
+% glossary types.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glsaddall}[1][]{%
+\def\@glo@type{\@glo@types}%
+\setkeys{glossadd}{#1}%
+\forallglsentries[\@glo@type]{\@glo@entry}{%
+\glsadd[#1]{\@glo@entry}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\subsection{Creating associated files}
+%\DescribeMacro{\writeist}
+% The \cmdname{writeist} command creates the associated 
+% customized \filetype{ist} \appname{makeindex} style file.
+% While defining this command, some characters have their 
+% catcodes temporarily changed to ensure they get written to 
+% the \filetype{ist} file correctly. The \appname{makeindex} 
+% actual character (usually "@") is redefined to be a "?", to allow 
+% internal commands to be written to the glossary file output file.
+%
+% The special characters\mkidxspch\ are stored in \cmdname{@gls@actualchar},
+% \cmdname{@gls@encapchar}, \cmdname{@glsl@levelchar} and
+% \cmdname{@gls@quotechar} to make them easier to use later,
+% but don't change these values, because the characters are
+% encoded in the command definitions that are used to escape
+% the special characters (which means that the user no longer
+% needs to worry about \appname{makeindex} special characters.)
+%
+% The symbols and numbers label for group headings are hardwired into
+% the \filetype{ist} file as \texttt{glssymbols} and 
+% \texttt{glsnumbers}, the group titles can be translated 
+% (so that \icmdname{glssymbolsgroupname} replaces \texttt{glssymbols}
+% and \icmdname{glsnumbersgroupname} replaces \texttt{glsnumbers})
+% using the command \icmdname{glsgetgrouptitle} which is
+% defined in \styname{glossary-hypernav}. This is done to prevent
+% any problem characters in \icmdname{glssymbolsgroupname}
+% and \icmdname{glsnumbersgroupname} from breaking hyperlinks.
+%
+% Some of these lines are too long to fit on the page, but as I 
+% have temporarily disabled the comment character, I can't split
+% the lines. If you want to see the code in full, have a look at
+% \texttt{glossaries.sty}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newwrite\istfile
+\bgroup
+\catcode`\%12\relax
+\catcode`\"12\relax
+\catcode`\|12\relax
+\catcode`\!12\relax
+\catcode`\?12\relax
+\gdef\@gls@actualchar{?}
+\gdef\@gls@encapchar{|}
+\gdef\@gls@levelchar{!}
+\gdef\@gls@quotechar{"}
+\gdef\writeist{\relax
+\protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\@istfilename{\istfilename}}
+\openout\istfile=\istfilename
+\write\istfile{% makeindex style file created by the glossaries package}
+\write\istfile{% for document '\jobname' on \the\year-\the\month-\the\day}
+\write\istfile{actual '\@gls@actualchar'}
+\write\istfile{encap '\@gls@encapchar'}
+\write\istfile{level '\@gls@levelchar'}
+\write\istfile{quote '\@gls@quotechar'}
+\write\istfile{keyword "\string\\glossaryentry"}
+\write\istfile{preamble "\string\\glossarysection[\string\\glossarytoctitle]{\string\\glossarytitle}\string\\glossarypreamble\string\n\string\\begin{theglossary}\string\\glossaryheader\string\n"}
+\write\istfile{postamble "\string\n\string\\end{theglossary}\string\n\string\\glossarypostamble\string\n"}
+\write\istfile{group_skip "\string\\glsgroupskip\string\n"}
+\write\istfile{item_0 "\string\n"}
+\write\istfile{delim_0 "\{\string\\glossaryentrynumbers\{\string\\relax"}
+\write\istfile{delim_t "\}\}"}
+\write\istfile{delim_n "\string\\delimN"}
+\write\istfile{delim_r "\string\\delimR"}
+\write\istfile{headings_flag 1}
+\write\istfile{heading_prefix "\string\\glsgroupheading\{"}
+\write\istfile{heading_suffix "\}"}
+\write\istfile{symhead_positive "glssymbols"}
+\write\istfile{numhead_positive "glsnumbers"}
+\write\istfile{page_compositor "\glscompositor"}
+\noist}
+\egroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\noist}
+%The command \cmdname{noist} will suppress the creation of
+% the \filetype{ist} file (it simply redefines 
+% \cmdname{writeist} to do nothing.) Obviously you need to use this
+% command before \cmdname{writeist} to have any effect. Since
+% the \filetype{ist} file should only be created once, \cmdname{noist}
+% is called at the end of \cmdname{writeist}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\noist}{\let\writeist\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\@makeglossary}
+% \cmdname{@makeglossary} is an internal command that takes an 
+% argument indicating the glossary type. This command will 
+% create the glossary file required by \appname{makeindex} for the
+% given glossary type, using the extension supplied by the
+% \meta{out-ext} parameter used in \icmdname{newglossary} 
+% (and it will also activate the \icmdname{glossary} command, 
+% and create the customized \filetype{ist} \appname{makeindex} 
+% style file.) 
+%
+% Note that you can't use \cmdname{@makeglossary} for only some of the
+% defined glossaries. You either need to have a \cmdname{makeglossary}
+% for all glossaries or none (otherwise you will end up with a
+% situation where \TeX\ is trying to write to a non-existant
+% file.) The relevant glossary must be
+% defined prior to using \cmdname{@makeglossary}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@makeglossary}[1]{%
+\ifglossaryexists{#1}{%
+\edef\glo@out{\csname @glotype@#1@out\endcsname}%
+\expandafter\newwrite\csname glo@#1@file\endcsname
+\edef\@glo@file{\csname glo@#1@file\endcsname}%
+\immediate\openout\@glo@file=\jobname.\glo@out
+\@gls@renewglossary
+\PackageInfo{glossaries}{Writing glossary file \jobname.\glo@out}
+\writeist
+}{\PackageError{glossaries}{%
+Glossary type `#1' not defined}{New glossaries must be defined before
+using \string\makeglossary}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\makeglossaries}
+% \cmdname{makeglossaries} will use \cmdname{@makeglossary}
+% for each glossary type that has been defined.  New glossaries
+% need to be defined before using \cmdname{makeglossary}, so
+% have \cmdname{makeglossaries} redefine \cmdname{newglossary}
+% to prevent it being used afterwards.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\makeglossaries}{%
+\@for\@glo@type:=\@glo@types\do{%
+\ifthenelse{\equal{\@glo@type}{}}{}{%
+\@makeglossary{\@glo@type}}}%
+\renewcommand*\newglossary[4][]{%
+\PackageError{glossaries}{New glossaries
+must be created before \string\makeglossaries}{You need
+to move \string\makeglossaries\space after all your 
+\string\newglossary\space commands}}%
+\let\@makeglossary\empty
+\let\makeglossary\empty}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\makeglossary}
+% The \cmdname{makeglossary} command is redefined to be
+% identical to \cmdname{makeglossaries}. (This is done to 
+% reinforce the message that you must either use 
+% \cmdname{@makeglossary} for all the glossaries or for none 
+% of them.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\makeglossary\makeglossaries
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\subsection{Writing information to associated files}
+%\DescribeMacro{\glossary}
+% The \cmdname{glossary} command is redefined so that it takes an 
+% optional argument \meta{type} to specify the glossary type (use 
+% \cmdname{glsdefaulttype} glossary by default). 
+% This shouldn't be used at user level
+% as \cmdname{glslink} sets the correct format. The associated 
+% number should be stored in \cmdname{theglsentrycounter}
+% before using \cmdname{glossary}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*{\glossary}[1][\glsdefaulttype]{%
+\@glossary[#1]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\@glossary}
+% Define internal \cmdname{@glossary} to ignore its argument.
+% This gets redefined in \cmdname{@makeglossary}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@glossary[#1]{\@bsphack\begingroup\@sanitize\@index}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\DescribeMacro{@gls@renewglossary}
+% This is a convenience command to set \cmdname{@glossary}.
+% It is used by \cmdname{@makeglossary} and then redefined to
+% do nothing, as it only needs to be done once.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@gls@renewglossary}{%
+\gdef\@glossary[##1]{\@bsphack\begingroup\@wrglossary{##1}}%
+\let\@gls@renewglossary\@empty
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\DescribeMacro{\@wrglossary}
+% The \cmdname{@wrglossary} command is redefined to have
+% two arguments. The first argument is the glossary type, 
+% the second argument is the glossary entry 
+% (the format of which is set in \cmdname{glslink}.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*{\@wrglossary}[2]{%
+\expandafter\protected@write\csname glo@#1@file\endcsname{}{%
+\string\glossaryentry{#2}{\theglsentrycounter}}\endgroup\@esphack}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Displaying the glossary}\label{sec:printglos}
+%\DescribeMacro{\printglossary}
+% An individual glossary is displayed in the text using
+% \cmdname{printglossary}\oarg{key-val list}. If the 
+% \gloskey[printglossary]{type} key is omitted, the default glossary is displayed.
+% The optional argument can be used to specify an alternative
+% glossary, and can also be used to set the style, title and
+% entry in the table of contents. Available keys are defined below.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\printglossary}[1][type=\glsdefaulttype]{%
+\def\@glo@type{\glsdefaulttype}%
+\def\glossarytitle{\csname @glotype@\@glo@type @title\endcsname}%
+\def\glossarytoctitle{\glossarytitle}%
+\def\@glossarystyle{}%
+\setkeys{printgloss}{#1}%
+\bgroup
+\@glossarystyle
+\makeatletter
+\@input@{\jobname.\csname @glotype@\@glo@type @in\endcsname}%
+\egroup
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\printglossaries}
+% This command will do \cmdname{printglossary}
+% for each glossary type that has been defined. It is better
+% to use \cmdname{printglossaries} rather than individual
+% \cmdname{printglossary} commands to ensure that you don't forget
+% any new glossaries you may have created. It also makes it easier to
+% chop and change the value of the \pkgopt{acronym} package option.
+% However, if you want to list the glossaries in a different order,
+% or if you want to set the title or table of contents entry, or
+% if you want to use different glossary styles for each glossary, you
+% will need to use \cmdname{printglossary} explicitly for each
+% glossary type.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\printglossaries}{%
+\forallglossaries{\@@glo@type}{\printglossary[type=\@@glo@type]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The keys that can be used in the optional argument to
+% \icmdname{printglossary} are as follows:
+% The \gloskey[printglossary]{type} key sets the glossary type.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{printgloss}{type}{\def\@glo@type{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \gloskey[printglossary]{title} key sets the title used in the glossary section
+% header. This overrides the title used in \icmdname{newglossary}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{printgloss}{title}{\def\glossarytitle{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \gloskey[printglossary]{toctitle} sets the text used for the relevant entry 
+% in the table of contents.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{printgloss}{toctitle}{\def\glossarytoctitle{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \gloskey[printglossary]{style} key sets the glossary style (but only for
+% the given glossary.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{printgloss}{style}{%
+\@ifundefined{@glsstyle@#1}{\PackageError{glossaries}{Glossary 
+style `#1' undefined}{}}{%
+\def\@glossarystyle{\csname @glsstyle@#1\endcsname}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeEnv{theglossary}
+% If the \envname{theglossary} environment has 
+% already been defined, a warning will be issued. 
+% This environment should be redefined by glossary styles.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{theglossary}{%
+\newenvironment{theglossary}{}{}}{%
+\PackageWarning{glossaries}{overriding `theglossary' environment}%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{}{}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\glossaryheader}
+% The glossary header is given by \cmdname{glossaryheader}. 
+% This forms part of the glossary style, and
+% must indicate what should appear immediately after the start of the
+% \envname{theglossary} environment. (For example, if the glossary
+% uses a tabular-like environment, it may be used to set the
+% header row.) Note that if you don't want a header row, the glossary
+% style must redefine \cmdname{glossaryheader} to do nothing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\vskip5pt
+%\DescribeMacro{\glossaryentryfield}
+% \cmdname{glossaryentryfield}\marg{label}\marg{name}\marg{description}\marg{symbol}\marg{page-list}\\[10pt]
+% This command governs how each entry row should be formatted 
+% in the glossary. Glossary styles need to redefine this command.
+% Most of the predefined styles ignore \meta{symbol}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
+\@glstarget{glo:#1}{#2} #4 #3. #5\par}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\glsgroupskip}
+% Within each glossary, the entries form 28 distinct groups
+% which are determined by the first character of the \gloskey{sort} 
+% key. There will be a maximum of 28 groups: symbols, numbers,
+% and the 26 alphabetical groups A, \ldots, Z\@. 
+% The command \cmdname{glsgroupskip} 
+% specifies what to do between glossary groups. Glossary styles
+% must redefine this command. (Note that \cmdname{glsgroupskip}
+% only occurs between groups, not at the start or end of the
+% glossary.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\glsgroupheading}
+% Each of the 28 glossary groups described above is preceded by a 
+% group heading.
+% This is formatted by the command \cmdname{glsgroupheading}
+% which takes one argument which is the \emph{label} assigned to that
+% group (not the title). The corresponding labels are: \texttt{glssymbols},
+% \texttt{glsnumbers}, \texttt{A}, \ldots, \texttt{Z}. 
+% Glossary styles must redefined this command. (In between groups,
+% \cmdname{glsgroupheading} comes immediately after \cmdname{glsgroupskip}.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% It is therefore possible to ``trick'' \appname{makeindex} into
+% treating entries as though they belong to the same group, 
+% even if the terms don't start with the same letter, by
+% modifying the \gloskey{sort} key. For example, all entries 
+% belonging to one
+% group could be defined so that the \gloskey{sort} key starts with an
+% "a", while entries belonging to another group could be defined
+% so that the \gloskey{sort} key starts with a "b", and so on. If
+% you want each group to have a heading, you would then need to
+% modify the translation control sequences \cmdname{glsgetgrouptitle}
+% and \cmdname{glsgetgrouplabel} so that the label is translated
+% into the required title (and vice-versa.)
+%\\[10pt]
+%\DescribeMacro{\glsgetgrouptitle}
+%\cmdname{glsgetgrouptitle}\marg{label}\\[10pt]
+% This command produces the title for the glossary group
+% whose label is given by \meta{label}. By default, the group
+% labelled \texttt{glssymbols} produces 
+% \icmdname{glssymbolsgroupname}, the group labelled 
+% \texttt{glsnumbers} produces \icmdname{glsnumbersgroupname}
+% and all the other groups simply produce their label.
+% As mentioned above, the group labels are: \texttt{glssymbols}, \texttt{glsnumbers},
+% \texttt{A}, \ldots, \texttt{Z}\@. If you want to redefine
+% the group titles, you will need to redefine this command.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glsgetgrouptitle}[1]{%
+\@ifundefined{#1groupname}{#1}{\csname #1groupname\endcsname}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\vskip5pt
+%\DescribeMacro{\glsgetgrouplabel}
+%\cmdname{glsgetgrouplabel}\marg{title}\\[10pt]
+%This command does the reverse to the previous command. The
+% argument is the group title, and it produces the group label.
+% Note that if you redefine \cmdname{glsgetgrouptitle}, you
+% will also need to redefine \cmdname{glsgetgrouplabel}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glsgetgrouplabel}[1]{%
+\ifthenelse{\equals{#1}{\glssymbolsgroupname}}{glssymbols}{%
+\ifthenelse{\equals{#1}{\glsnumbersgroupname}}{glsnumbers}{#1}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\setentrycounter}
+% The command \cmdname{setentrycounter} sets the entry's 
+% associated counter (required by 
+% \cmdname{glshypernumber} etc.) \icmdname{glslink} and
+% \icmdname{glsadd} encode the
+% \icmdname{glossary} argument so that the relevant counter is
+% set prior to the formatting command.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\setentrycounter}[1]{\def\glsentrycounter{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\glossarystyle}
+% The current glossary style can be set using
+% \cmdname{glossarystyle}\marg{style}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glossarystyle}[1]{%
+\@ifundefined{@glsstyle@#1}{\PackageError{glossaries}{Glossary 
+style `#1' undefined}{}}{%
+\csname @glsstyle@#1\endcsname}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\newglossarystyle}
+% New glossary styles can be defined using:\\[10pt]
+% \cmdname{newglossarystyle}\marg{name}\marg{definition}\\[10pt]
+% The \meta{definition} argument should redefine 
+% \envname{theglossary}, \icmdname{glossaryheader}, 
+% \icmdname{glsgroupheading}, \icmdname{glossaryentryfield} and
+% \icmdname{glsgroupskip} (see \autoref{sec:styles} for the
+% definitions of predefined styles.) Glossary styles should not 
+% redefine \icmdname{glossarypreamble} and 
+% \icmdname{glossarypostamble}, as
+% the user should be able to switch between styles without affecting
+% the pre- and postambles.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\newglossarystyle}[2]{%
+\@ifundefined{@glsstyle@#1}{%
+\expandafter\def\csname @glsstyle@#1\endcsname{#2}}{%
+\PackageError{glossaries}{Glossary style `#1' is already defined}{}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\glsnamefont}
+% Glossary entries are encoded so that the second argument
+% to \icmdname{glossaryentryfield} is always specified as
+% \cmdname{glsnamefont}\marg{name}. This allows the
+% user to change the font used to display the name term
+% without having to redefine \icmdname{glossaryentryfield}.
+% The default uses the surrounding font, so in the list type
+% styles (which place the name in the optional argument to
+% \icmdname{item}) the name will appear in bold.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glsnamefont}[1]{#1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\glshypernumber}
+% Each glossary entry has an associated number list (usually page
+% numbers) that indicate where in the document the entry has been
+% used. The format for these number lists can be changed using the
+% \gloskey[glslink]{format}\igloskey[glsadd]{format} key in commands like \icmdname{glslink}.
+% The default format is given by \cmdname{glshypernumber}. This takes
+% a single argument which may be a single number, a number range
+% or a number list. The number ranges are delimited with 
+% \icmdname{delimR}, the number lists are delimited with 
+% \icmdname{delimN}.
+%
+% If the document doesn't have hyperlinks, the numbers can be
+% displayed just as they are, but if the document supports 
+% hyperlinks, the numbers should link to the relevant location.
+% This means extracting the individual numbers from the list or
+% ranges. The \styname{hyperref} package does this with the
+% \icmdname{hyperpage} command, but this is encoded for comma and
+% dash delimiters and only for the page counter, but this code needs
+% to be more general. So I have adapted the code used in the
+% \styname{hyperref} package.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{hyperlink}{%
+\def\glshypernumber#1{#1}}{%
+\def\glshypernumber#1{%
+\@delimR#1\delimR\delimR\\}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\DescribeMacro{@delimR}
+% \cmdname{@delimR} displays a range of numbers for the counter 
+% whose name is given by 
+% \cmdname{@gls@counter} (which must be set prior to using
+% \cmdname{glshypernumber}.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@delimR#1\delimR #2\delimR #3\\{%
+\ifx\\#2\\%
+  \@delimN{#1}%
+\else
+  \@gls@numberlink{#1}\delimR\@gls@numberlink{#2}%
+\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\DescribeMacro{\@delimN}
+% \cmdname{@delimN} displays a list of individual numbers, 
+% instead of a range:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@delimN#1{\@@delimN#1\delimN \delimN\\}
+\def\@@delimN#1\delimN #2\delimN#3\\{%
+\ifx\\#3\\%
+  \@gls@numberlink{#1}%
+\else
+  \@gls@numberlink{#1}\delimN\@gls@numberlink{#2}%
+\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The following code is modified from hyperref's 
+% \cmdname{HyInd@pagelink} where
+% the name of the counter being used is given by 
+% \cmdname{@gls@counter}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@gls@numberlink#1{%
+\begingroup
+ \toks@={}%
+ \@gls@removespaces#1 \@nil
+\endgroup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@gls@removespaces#1 #2\@nil{%
+ \toks@=\expandafter{\the\toks@#1}%
+ \ifx\\#2\\%
+   \edef\x{\the\toks@}%
+   \ifx\x\empty
+   \else
+     \hyperlink{\glsentrycounter.\the\toks@}{\the\toks@}%
+   \fi
+ \else
+   \@gls@ReturnAfterFi{%
+     \@gls@removespaces#2\@nil
+   }%
+ \fi
+}
+\long\def\@gls@ReturnAfterFi#1\fi{\fi#1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following commands will switch to the
+% appropriate font, and create a hyperlink, if hyperlinks are
+% supported. If hyperlinks are not supported, they will just
+% display their argument in the appropriate font.
+%\DescribeMacro{\hyperrm}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\hyperrm}[1]{\textrm{\glshypernumber{#1}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\DescribeMacro{\hypersf}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\hypersf}[1]{\textsf{\glshypernumber{#1}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\DescribeMacro{\hypertt}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\hypertt}[1]{\texttt{\glshypernumber{#1}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\DescribeMacro{\hyperbf}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\hyperbf}[1]{\textbf{\glshypernumber{#1}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\DescribeMacro{\hypermd}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\hypermd}[1]{\textmd{\glshypernumber{#1}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\DescribeMacro{\hyperit}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\hyperit}[1]{\textit{\glshypernumber{#1}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\DescribeMacro{\hypersl}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\hypersl}[1]{\textsl{\glshypernumber{#1}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\DescribeMacro{\hyperup}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\hyperup}[1]{\textup{\glshypernumber{#1}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\DescribeMacro{\hypersc}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\hypersc}[1]{\textsc{\glshypernumber{#1}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\DescribeMacro{\hyperemph}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\hyperemph}[1]{\emph{\glshypernumber{#1}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\subsection{Acronyms}\label{sec:acronym}
+%If the \pkgopt{acronym} package option is used, a 
+% new glossary called "acronym" is created
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifglsacronym
+\newglossary[alg]{acronym}{acr}{acn}{\acronymname}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%and \icmdname{acronymtype} is set to the name of this new glossary.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\acronymtype}{acronym}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% In the event that the user redefines \icmdname{glsdisplay}
+% and \icmdname{glsdisplayfirst}, the relevant commands for
+% the new acronym glossary are set to match the format
+% given by \icmdname{newacronym}. If you redefine 
+% \icmdname{newacronym} you may need to set these to something
+% else.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\defglsdisplay[acronym]{#1#4}\defglsdisplayfirst[acronym]{#1#4}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\vskip5pt
+%\DescribeMacro{\newacronym}
+% \cmdname{newacronym}\oarg{key-val list}\marg{label}\marg{abbrev}\marg{long}\\[10pt]
+% This is a quick way of defining acronyms, all it does
+% is call \icmdname{newglossaryentry} with the appropriate
+% values. It sets the
+% glossary type to \icmdname{acronymtype} which will be
+% "acronym" if the package option \pkgopt{acronym} has
+% been used, otherwise it will be the default glossary.
+% Since \cmdname{newacronym} merely calls \icmdname{newglossaryentry},
+% the acronym is treated like any other glossary entry.
+%
+% If you prefer a different format, you
+% can redefine \cmdname{newacronym} as required. The optional 
+% argument can be used to override any of the settings.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\newacronym}[4][]{%
+\newglossaryentry{#2}{type=\acronymtype,
+name={#3},description={#4},text={#3},
+first={#4 (#3)},plural={#3s},firstplural={#4s (#3s)},#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% New acronyms can only be defined in the preamble:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@onlypreamble{\newacronym}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Predefined Styles}\label{sec:styles}
+% The \styname{glossaries} bundle comes with some predefined glossary styles which
+% are defined in the following packages:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{glossary-hypernav}
+\RequirePackage{glossary-list}
+\RequirePackage{glossary-long}
+\RequirePackage{glossary-super}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The default glossary style is set according to the \pkgopt{style} package
+% option, but can be overridden by \icmdname{glossarystyle}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\glossarystyle{\@glossary@default@style}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\iffalse
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</glossaries.sty>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\fi
+%\iffalse
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*glossary-hypernav.sty>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\fi
+% \subsubsection{Glossary hyper-navigation definitions (glossary-hypernav package)}
+% Package Definition:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ProvidesPackage{glossary-hypernav}[2007/05/16 v1.0 (NLCT)]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The commands defined in this package are provided to 
+% help navigate around the groups within a glossary 
+% (see \autoref{sec:printglos}.)
+% \icmdname{printglossary} (and \icmdname{printglossaries})
+% set \cmdname{@glo@type} to the label of the current
+% glossary. This is used to create a unique hypertarget in
+% the event of multiple glossaries.
+%\\[10pt]
+%\DescribeMacro{\glsnavhyperlink}
+% \cmdname{glsnavhyperlink}\oarg{type}\marg{label}\marg{text}\\[10pt]
+% This command makes \meta{text} a hyperlink to the glossary group
+% whose label is given by \meta{label} for the glossary given
+% by \meta{type}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{hyperlink}{%
+\newcommand*{\glsnavhyperlink}[3][]{#3}}{%
+\newcommand*{\glsnavhyperlink}[3][\@glo@type]{%
+\edef\gls@grplabel{#2}\edef\@gls@grptitle{#3}%
+\hyperlink{glsn:#1@#2}{#3}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\vskip5pt
+%\DescribeMacro{\glsnavhypertarget}
+% \cmdname{glsnavhypertarget}\oarg{type}\marg{label}\marg{text}\\[10pt]
+% This command makes \meta{text} a hypertarget for the glossary group
+% whose label is given by \meta{label} in the glossary given
+% by \meta{type}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{hypertarget}{%
+\newcommand*{\glsnavhypertarget}[3][]{#3}}{%
+\newcommand*{\glsnavhypertarget}[3][\@glo@type]{%
+\hypertarget{glsn:#1@#2}{#3}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\DescribeMacro{\glsnavigation}
+% The \cmdname{glsnavigation} command displays a simple glossary 
+% group navigation. 
+% The symbol and number elements are defined separately, 
+% so that they can be suppressed if need be. Note that this 
+% command will produce a link to all 28 groups, but some groups
+% may not be defined if there are groups that do not contain any
+% terms, in which case you will get an undefined hyperlink warning.
+% Now for the whole navigation bit:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glsnavigation}{%
+\glssymbolnav
+\glsnavhyperlink{A}{\glsgetgrouptitle{A}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{B}{\glsgetgrouptitle{B}} \textbar\ 
+\glsnavhyperlink{C}{\glsgetgrouptitle{C}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{D}{\glsgetgrouptitle{D}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{E}{\glsgetgrouptitle{E}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{F}{\glsgetgrouptitle{F}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{G}{\glsgetgrouptitle{G}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{H}{\glsgetgrouptitle{H}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{I}{\glsgetgrouptitle{I}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{J}{\glsgetgrouptitle{J}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{K}{\glsgetgrouptitle{K}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{L}{\glsgetgrouptitle{L}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{M}{\glsgetgrouptitle{M}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{N}{\glsgetgrouptitle{N}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{O}{\glsgetgrouptitle{O}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{P}{\glsgetgrouptitle{P}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{Q}{\glsgetgrouptitle{Q}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{R}{\glsgetgrouptitle{R}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{S}{\glsgetgrouptitle{S}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{T}{\glsgetgrouptitle{T}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{U}{\glsgetgrouptitle{U}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{V}{\glsgetgrouptitle{V}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{W}{\glsgetgrouptitle{W}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{X}{\glsgetgrouptitle{X}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{Y}{\glsgetgrouptitle{Y}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{Z}{\glsgetgrouptitle{Z}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\DescribeMacro{\glssymbolnav}
+% The \cmdname{glssymbolnav} produces a simple navigation set of
+% links for just the symbol and number groups. This is used at
+% the start of \cmdname{glsnavigation}. If your glossary doesn't
+% contain any symbol or navigation groups, you can redefine this
+% command to do nothing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\glssymbolnav}{%
+\glsnavhyperlink{glssymbols}{\glsgetgrouptitle{glssymbols}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{glsnumbers}{\glsgetgrouptitle{glsnumbers}} \textbar\ 
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\iffalse
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</glossary-hypernav.sty>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\fi
+%\iffalse
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*glossary-list.sty>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\fi
+% \subsubsection{List Style (glossary-list package)}
+% The \styname{glossary-list} package defines glossary styles
+% that use the \envname{description} environment. Note that since
+% the entry name is placed in the optional argument to the
+% \icmdname{item} command, it will appear in a bold font by
+% default.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ProvidesPackage{glossary-list}[2007/05/16 v1.0 (NLCT)]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \glostyle{list} glossary style 
+% uses the \envname{description} environment. The group separator
+% \icmdname{glsgroupskip} is redefined as \cmdname{indexspace}
+% which produces a gap between groups. The glossary heading
+% and the group headings do nothing. This is used as the default
+% style for the \styname{glossaries} package.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newglossarystyle{list}{%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{\begin{description}}{\end{description}}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}%
+\renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
+\item[\@glstarget{glo:##1}{##2}] ##3. ##5}%
+\renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{\indexspace}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \glostyle{listgroup} style is like the \glostyle{list}
+% style, but the glossary groups have headings.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newglossarystyle{listgroup}{%
+\glossarystyle{list}%
+\renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{\item[##1]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \glostyle{listhypergroup} style is like the \glostyle{listgroup}
+% style, but has a set of links to the groups at the
+% start of the glossary.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newglossarystyle{listhypergroup}{%
+\glossarystyle{list}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{%
+\item[]\glsnavigation}%
+\renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{%
+\item[\glsnavhypertarget{##1}{\glsgetgrouptitle{##1}}]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \glostyle{altlist} glossary style is like the \glostyle{list}
+% style, but places the description on a new line.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newglossarystyle{altlist}{%
+\glossarystyle{list}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
+\item[\@glstarget{glo:##1}{##2}]\mbox{}\newline ##3. ##5}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \glostyle{altlistgroup} glossary style is like the
+% \glostyle{altlist} style, but the glossary groups have headings.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newglossarystyle{altlistgroup}{%
+\glossarystyle{altlist}%
+\renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{\item[##1]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \glostyle{altlisthypergroup} glossary style is like the
+% \glostyle{altlisthypergroup} style, but has a 
+% set of links to the groups at the start of the glossary.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newglossarystyle{altlisthypergroup}{%
+\glossarystyle{altlist}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{%
+\item[]\glsnavigation}%
+\renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{%
+\item[\glsnavhypertarget{##1}{\glsgetgrouptitle{##1}}]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\iffalse
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</glossary-list.sty>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\fi
+%\iffalse
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*glossary-long.sty>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\fi
+% \subsubsection{Glossary Styles using longtable (the glossary-long
+% package)}
+% The glossary styles defined in the \styname{glossary-long} package
+% used the \envname{longtable} environment in the glossary.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ProvidesPackage{glossary-long}[2007/05/16 v1.0 (NLCT)]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Requires the \styname{longtable} package:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{longtable}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\DescribeMacro{\glsdescwidth}
+% This is a length that governs the width of the description column.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength\glsdescwidth
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\DescribeMacro{\glspagelistwidth}
+% This is a length that governs the width of the page list column.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength\glspagelistwidth
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Default values:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength{\glsdescwidth}{0.6\linewidth}
+\setlength{\glspagelistwidth}{0.1\linewidth}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 
+% The \glostyle{long} glossary style command which 
+% uses the \envname{longtable} environment:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newglossarystyle{long}{%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{\begin{longtable}{lp{\glsdescwidth}}}{%
+\end{longtable}}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}%
+\renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
+\@glstarget{glo:##1}{##2} & ##3. ##5\\}%
+\renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{ & \\}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \glostyle{longborder} style is like the above, but with horizontal and
+% vertical lines:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newglossarystyle{longborder}{%
+\glossarystyle{long}%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+\begin{longtable}{|l|p{\glsdescwidth}|}}{\end{longtable}}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{\hline\endhead\hline\endfoot}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \glostyle{longheader} style is like the
+% \glostyle{long} style but with a header:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newglossarystyle{longheader}{%
+\glossarystyle{long}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{%
+\bfseries \entryname & \bfseries \descriptionname\\
+\endhead}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \glostyle{longheaderborder} style is
+% like the \glostyle{long} style but with a header and border:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newglossarystyle{longheaderborder}{%
+\glossarystyle{longborder}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{%
+\hline\bfseries \entryname & \bfseries \descriptionname\\\hline
+\endhead
+\hline\endfoot}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \glostyle{long3col} style is like \glostyle{long} but with 3 columns
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newglossarystyle{long3col}{%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{\begin{longtable}{lp{\glsdescwidth}p{\glspagelistwidth}}}{%
+\end{longtable}}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}%
+\renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
+\@glstarget{glo:##1}{##2} & ##3 & ##5\\}%
+\renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{ & &\\}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \glostyle{long3colborder} style is like the
+% \glostyle{long3col} style but with a border:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newglossarystyle{long3colborder}{%
+\glossarystyle{long3col}%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+\begin{longtable}{|l|p{\glsdescwidth}|p{\glspagelistwidth}|}}{%
+\end{longtable}}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{\hline\endhead\hline\endfoot}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \glostyle{long3colheader} style is like \glostyle{long3col} but with a header row:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newglossarystyle{long3colheader}{%
+\glossarystyle{long3col}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{%
+\bfseries\entryname&\bfseries\descriptionname&
+\bfseries\pagelistname\\\endhead}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \glostyle{long3colheaderborder} style is like the above but with a border
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newglossarystyle{long3colheaderborder}{%
+\glossarystyle{long3colborder}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{%
+\hline
+\bfseries\entryname&\bfseries\descriptionname&
+\bfseries\pagelistname\\\hline\endhead
+\hline\endfoot}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \glostyle{long4col} style has four columns where the third column contains the value of the associated \gloskey{symbol} key.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newglossarystyle{long4col}{%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+\begin{longtable}{llll}}{%
+\end{longtable}}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}%
+\renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
+\@glstarget{glo:##1}{##2} & ##3 & ##4 & ##5\\}%
+\renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{ & & &\\}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \glostyle{long4colheader} style is like \glostyle{long4col} but with a header row.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newglossarystyle{long4colheader}{%
+\glossarystyle{long4col}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{%
+\bfseries\entryname&\bfseries\descriptionname&
+\bfseries \symbolname&
+\bfseries\pagelistname\\\endhead}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \glostyle{long4colborder} style is like \glostyle{long4col} but with a border.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newglossarystyle{long4colborder}{%
+\glossarystyle{long4col}%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+\begin{longtable}{|l|l|l|l|}}{%
+\end{longtable}}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{\hline\endhead\hline\endfoot}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \glostyle{long4colheaderborder} style is like the above but with a border.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newglossarystyle{long4colheaderborder}{%
+\glossarystyle{long4col}%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+\begin{longtable}{|l|l|l|l|}}{%
+\end{longtable}}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{%
+\hline\bfseries\entryname&\bfseries\descriptionname&
+\bfseries \symbolname&
+\bfseries\pagelistname\\\hline\endhead\hline\\\endfoot}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\iffalse
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</glossary-long.sty>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\fi
+%\iffalse
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*glossary-super.sty>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\fi
+% \subsubsection{Glossary Styles using supertabular environment (glossary-super package)}
+% The glossary styles defined in the \styname{glossary-super} package
+% use the \envname{supertabular} environment.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ProvidesPackage{glossary-super}[2007/05/16 v1.0 (NLCT)]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Requires the \styname{supertabular} package:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{supertabular}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \glostyle{super} glossary style uses the
+% \envname{supertabular} environment
+% (it uses lengths defined in the \styname{glossary-long} package.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newglossarystyle{super}{%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+\tablehead{}\tabletail{}%
+\begin{supertabular}{lp{\glsdescwidth}}}{%
+\end{supertabular}}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}%
+\renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
+\@glstarget{glo:##1}{##2} & ##3. ##5\\}%
+\renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{ & \\}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \glostyle{superborder} style is like the above, but with horizontal and
+% vertical lines:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newglossarystyle{superborder}{%
+\glossarystyle{super}%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+\tablehead{\hline}\tabletail{\hline}%
+\begin{supertabular}{|l|p{\glsdescwidth}|}}{\end{supertabular}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \glostyle{superheader} style is like the
+% \glostyle{super} style, but with a header:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newglossarystyle{superheader}{%
+\glossarystyle{super}%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+\tablehead{\bfseries \entryname & \bfseries \descriptionname\\}%
+\tabletail{}%
+\begin{supertabular}{lp{\glsdescwidth}}}{\end{supertabular}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \glostyle{superheaderborder} style is like
+% the \glostyle{super} style but with a header and border:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newglossarystyle{superheaderborder}{%
+\glossarystyle{super}%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+\tablehead{\hline\bfseries \entryname & \bfseries \descriptionname\\\hline}%
+\tabletail{\hline}
+\begin{supertabular}{|l|p{\glsdescwidth}|}}{\end{supertabular}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \glostyle{super3col} style is like the \glostyle{super} style, but with 3 columns:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newglossarystyle{super3col}{%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+\tablehead{}\tabletail{}%
+\begin{supertabular}{lp{\glsdescwidth}p{\glspagelistwidth}}}{%
+\end{supertabular}}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}%
+\renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
+\@glstarget{glo:##1}{##2} & ##3 & ##5\\}%
+\renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{ & &\\}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \glostyle{super3colborder} style is like the
+% \glostyle{super3col} style, but with a border:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newglossarystyle{super3colborder}{%
+\glossarystyle{super3col}%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+\tablehead{\hline}\tabletail{\hline}%
+\begin{supertabular}{|l|p{\glsdescwidth}|p{\glspagelistwidth}|}}{%
+\end{supertabular}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \glostyle{super3colheader} style is like 
+% the \glostyle{super3col} style but with a header row:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newglossarystyle{super3colheader}{%
+\glossarystyle{super3col}%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+\tablehead{\bfseries\entryname&\bfseries\descriptionname&
+\bfseries\pagelistname\\}\tabletail{}%
+\begin{supertabular}{lp{\glsdescwidth}p{\glspagelistwidth}}}{%
+\end{supertabular}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \glostyle{super3colheaderborder} style is like
+% the \glostyle{super3col} style but with a header and border:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newglossarystyle{super3colheaderborder}{%
+\glossarystyle{super3colborder}%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+\tablehead{\hline
+\bfseries\entryname&\bfseries\descriptionname&
+\bfseries\pagelistname\\\hline}%
+\tabletail{\hline}%
+\begin{supertabular}{|l|p{\glsdescwidth}|p{\glspagelistwidth}|}}{%
+\end{supertabular}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \glostyle{super4col} glossary style has four columns,
+% where the third column contains the value of the
+% corresponding \gloskey{symbol} key used when that entry
+% was defined.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newglossarystyle{super4col}{%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+\tablehead{}\tabletail{}%
+\begin{supertabular}{llll}}{%
+\end{supertabular}}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}%
+\renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
+\@glstarget{glo:##1}{##2} & ##3 & ##4 & ##5\\}%
+\renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{ & & &\\}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \glostyle{super4colheader} style is like
+% the \glostyle{super4col} but with a header row.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newglossarystyle{super4colheader}{%
+\glossarystyle{super4col}%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+\tablehead{\bfseries\entryname&\bfseries\descriptionname&
+\bfseries\symbolname &
+\bfseries\pagelistname\\}\tabletail{}%
+\begin{supertabular}{llll}}{%
+\end{supertabular}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \glostyle{super4colborder} style is like
+% the \glostyle{super4col} but with a border.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newglossarystyle{super4colborder}{%
+\glossarystyle{super4col}%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+\tablehead{\hline}\tabletail{\hline}%
+\begin{supertabular}{|l|l|l|l|}}{%
+\end{supertabular}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \glostyle{super4colheaderborder} style is like
+% the \glostyle{super4col} but with a header and border.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newglossarystyle{super4colheaderborder}{%
+\glossarystyle{super4col}%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+\tablehead{\hline\bfseries\entryname&\bfseries\descriptionname&
+\bfseries\symbolname &
+\bfseries\pagelistname\\}\tabletail{\hline}%
+\begin{supertabular}{|l|l|l|l|}}{%
+\end{supertabular}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\iffalse
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</glossary-super.sty>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\fi
+%\Finale
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/glossaries/glossaries.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/glossaries/glossaries.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..7af4cbdb771
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/glossaries/glossaries.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+% glossaries.ins generated using makedtx version 0.91b 2007/5/16 17:33
+\input docstrip
+
+\preamble
+Copyright (C) 2007 Nicola Talbot, all rights reserved.
+If you modify this file, you must change its name first.
+You are NOT ALLOWED to distribute this file alone. You are NOT
+ALLOWED to take money for the distribution or use of either this
+file or a changed version, except for a nominal charge for copying
+etc.
+\endpreamble
+
+\askforoverwritefalse
+
+\generate{\file{glossaries.sty}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble
+\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{glossaries.sty,package}}
+\file{glossary-long.sty}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble
+\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{glossary-long.sty,package}}
+\file{glossary-super.sty}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble
+\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{glossary-super.sty,package}}
+\file{glossary-hypernav.sty}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble
+\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{glossary-hypernav.sty,package}}
+\file{glossary-list.sty}{\usepreamble\defaultpreamble
+\usepostamble\defaultpostamble\from{glossaries.dtx}{glossary-list.sty,package}}
+}
+
+\endbatchfile
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossaries.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossaries.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8d0023a00f3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossaries.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,865 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `glossaries.sty',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% glossaries.dtx  (with options: `glossaries.sty,package')
+%% Copyright (C) 2007 Nicola Talbot, all rights reserved.
+%% If you modify this file, you must change its name first.
+%% You are NOT ALLOWED to distribute this file alone. You are NOT
+%% ALLOWED to take money for the distribution or use of either this
+%% file or a changed version, except for a nominal charge for copying
+%% etc.
+%% \CharacterTable
+%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesPackage{glossaries}[2007/05/16 v1.0 (NLCT)]
+\RequirePackage{ifthen}
+\RequirePackage{xkeyval}[2006/11/18]
+\RequirePackage{xspace}
+\define@boolkey{glossaries.sty}[gls]{toc}[true]{}
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{\newcommand*{\@@glossarysec}{section}}{%
+\newcommand*{\@@glossarysec}{chapter}}
+\define@choicekey{glossaries.sty}{section}{part,chapter,section,%
+subsection,subsubsection,paragraph,subparagraph}[section]{%
+\renewcommand*{\@@glossarysec}{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\@glossary@default@style}{list}
+\define@key{glossaries.sty}{style}{%
+\renewcommand*{\@glossary@default@style}{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\glossaryentrynumbers}[1]{#1}
+\DeclareOptionX{nonumberlist}{%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryentrynumbers}[1]{}}
+\newcommand{\glsdefaulttype}{main}
+\newcommand{\acronymtype}{\glsdefaulttype}
+\define@boolkey{glossaries.sty}[gls]{acronym}[true]{}
+\newcommand{\glscounter}{page}
+\define@key{glossaries.sty}{counter}{%
+\renewcommand*{\glscounter}{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\@gls@sanitizedesc}{\@onelevel@sanitize\@glo@desc}
+\newcommand*{\@gls@sanitizename}{\@onelevel@sanitize\@glo@name}
+\newcommand*{\@gls@sanitizesymbol}{\@onelevel@sanitize\@glo@symbol}
+\define@boolkey[gls]{sanitize}{description}[true]{%
+\ifgls@sanitize@description
+  \renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizedesc}{\@onelevel@sanitize\@glo@desc}%
+\else
+  \renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizedesc}{}%
+\fi
+}
+\define@boolkey[gls]{sanitize}{name}[true]{%
+\ifgls@sanitize@name
+  \renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizename}{\@onelevel@sanitize\@glo@name}%
+\else
+  \renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizename}{}%
+\fi}
+\define@boolkey[gls]{sanitize}{symbol}[true]{%
+\ifgls@sanitize@symbol
+  \renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizesymbol}{%
+\@onelevel@sanitize\@glo@symbol}%
+\else
+  \renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizesymbol}{}%
+\fi}
+\define@key{glossaries.sty}{sanitize}[description=true,symbol=true,
+name=true]{%
+\ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{none}}{%
+\renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizedesc}{}%
+\renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizename}{}%
+\renewcommand*{\@gls@sanitizesymbol}{}%
+}{\setkeys[gls]{sanitize}{#1}}%
+}
+\ProcessOptionsX
+\ifthenelse{\equal{\glscounter}{section}}{%
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{%
+\let\@gls@old@chapter\@chapter
+\def\@chapter[#1]#2{\@gls@old@chapter[{#1}]{#2}%
+\@ifundefined{hyperdef}{}{\hyperdef{section}{\thesection}{}}}}}{}
+\providecommand*{\glossaryname}{Glossary}
+\providecommand*{\acronymname}{Acronyms}
+\providecommand*{\entryname}{Notation}
+\providecommand*{\descriptionname}{Description}
+\providecommand*{\symbolname}{Symbol}
+\providecommand*{\pagelistname}{Page List}
+\providecommand*{\glssymbolsgroupname}{Symbols}
+\providecommand*{\glsnumbersgroupname}{Numbers}
+\providecommand*{\istfilename}{\jobname.ist}
+\newcommand*{\@istfilename}[1]{}
+\newcommand{\glscompositor}{.}
+\@ifundefined{hyperlink}{%
+\newcommand*{\glsnumberformat}[1]{#1}}{%
+\newcommand*{\glsnumberformat}[1]{\glshypernumber{#1}}}
+\newcommand{\delimN}{, }
+\newcommand{\delimR}{--}
+\newcommand*{\glossarypreamble}{}
+\newcommand*{\glossarypostamble}{}
+\newcommand*{\glossarysection}[2][\@gls@title]{%
+\def\@gls@title{#2}%
+\@ifundefined{phantomsection}{%
+\@glossarysection{#1}{#2}}{\@p@glossarysection{#1}{#2}}%
+}
+\newcommand*{\@glossarysection}[2]{%
+\csname\@@glossarysec\endcsname*{#2}
+\@gls@toc{#1}{\@@glossarysec}}
+\newcommand*{\@p@glossarysection}[2]{%
+\gls@doclearpage
+\phantomsection\@gls@toc{#1}{\@@glossarysec}%
+\csname\@@glossarysec\endcsname*{#2}}
+\newcommand{\gls@doclearpage}{%
+\ifthenelse{\equal{\@@glossarysec}{chapter}}{%
+\@ifundefined{cleardoublepage}{\clearpage}{\cleardoublepage}}{}%
+}
+\newcommand*{\@gls@toc}[2]{%
+\ifglstoc \addcontentsline{toc}{#2}{#1}\fi}
+\newcommand*{\forallglossaries}[3][\@glo@types]{%
+\@for#2:=#1\do{\ifthenelse{\equal{#2}{}}{}{#3}}}
+\newcommand*{\forglsentries}[3][\glsdefaulttype]{%
+\edef\@@glo@list{\csname glolist@#1\endcsname}%
+\@for#2:=\@@glo@list\do{%
+\ifthenelse{\equal{#2}{}}{}{#3}}}
+\newcommand*{\forallglsentries}[3][\@glo@types]{%
+\expandafter\forallglossaries\expandafter[#1]{\@@this@glo@}{%
+\forglsentries[\@@this@glo@]{#2}{#3}}}
+\newcommand{\ifglossaryexists}[3]{%
+\@ifundefined{@glotype@#1@out}{#3}{#2}}
+\newcommand{\ifglsentryexists}[3]{%
+\@ifundefined{glo@#1@name}{#3}{#2}}
+\newcommand*{\ifglsused}[3]{\ifthenelse{\boolean{glo@#1@flag}}{#2}{#3}}
+\newcommand{\glsdoifexists}[2]{\ifglsentryexists{#1}{#2}{%
+\PackageError{glossaries}{Glossary entry `#1' has not been
+defined.}{You need to define a glossary entry before you
+can use it.}}}
+\newcommand{\glsdoifnoexists}[2]{\ifglsentryexists{#1}{%
+\PackageError{glossaries}{Glossary entry `#1' has already
+been defined.}{}}{#2}}
+\newcommand*{\@glo@types}{,}
+\newcommand*{\newglossary}[5][glg]{%
+\ifglossaryexists{#2}{%
+\PackageError{glossaries}{Glossary type `#2' already exists}{%
+You can't define a new glossary called `#2' because it already
+exists}%
+}{%
+\toks@{#2}\edef\@glo@types{\@glo@types\the\toks@,}%
+\expandafter\gdef\csname glolist@#2\endcsname{,}%
+\expandafter\def\csname @glotype@#2@in\endcsname{#3}%
+\expandafter\def\csname @glotype@#2@out\endcsname{#4}%
+\expandafter\def\csname @glotype@#2@title\endcsname{#5}%
+\protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\@newglossary{#2}{#1}{#3}{#4}}%
+\expandafter\gdef\csname gls@#2@display\endcsname{%
+\glsdisplay}%
+\expandafter\gdef\csname gls@#2@displayfirst\endcsname{%
+\glsdisplayfirst}%
+\@ifnextchar[{\@gls@setcounter{#2}}{\@gls@setcounter{#2}[\glscounter]}}}
+\@onlypreamble{\newglossary}
+\newcommand*{\@newglossary}[4]{}
+\def\@gls@setcounter#1[#2]{%
+\expandafter\def\csname @glotype@#1@counter\endcsname{#2}%
+}
+\newcommand*{\@gls@getcounter}[1]{%
+\csname @glotype@#1@counter\endcsname}
+\newglossary{main}{gls}{glo}{\glossaryname}
+\define@key{glossentry}{name}{%
+\def\@glo@name{#1}%
+}
+\define@key{glossentry}{description}{%
+\def\@glo@desc{#1}%
+}
+\define@key{glossentry}{sort}{%
+\def\@glo@sort{#1}%
+\@onelevel@sanitize\@glo@sort}
+\define@key{glossentry}{text}{%
+\def\@glo@text{#1}%
+}
+\define@key{glossentry}{plural}{%
+\def\@glo@plural{#1}%
+}
+\define@key{glossentry}{first}{%
+\def\@glo@first{#1}%
+}
+\define@key{glossentry}{firstplural}{%
+\def\@glo@firstplural{#1}%
+}
+\define@key{glossentry}{symbol}{%
+\def\@glo@symbol{#1}%
+}
+\define@key{glossentry}{type}{%
+\def\@glo@type{#1}}
+\define@key{glossentry}{counter}{%
+\@ifundefined{c@#1}{\PackageError{glossaries}{There is no counter
+called `#1'}{The counter key should have the name of a valid
+counter as its value}}{%
+\def\@glo@counter{#1}}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\newglossaryentry}[2]{%
+\glsdoifnoexists{#1}{%
+\def\@glo@name{\PackageError{glossaries}{name key required in
+\string\newglossaryentry}{You haven't specified the entry name}}%
+\def\@glo@desc{\PackageError{glossaries}{desc key required in
+\string\newglossaryentry}{You haven't specified the entry description}}%
+\def\@glo@type{\glsdefaulttype}%
+\def\@glo@symbol{\relax}%
+\def\@glo@text{\@glo@name}%
+\def\@glo@plural{\@glo@text s}%
+\def\@glo@first{\@glo@text}%
+\def\@glo@firstplural{\@glo@plural}%
+\def\@glo@sort{\@glo@name\space\@glo@desc}%
+\def\@glo@counter{\@gls@getcounter{\@glo@type}}%
+\setkeys{glossentry}{#2}%
+\@ifundefined{glolist@\@glo@type}{\PackageError{glossaries}{%
+Glossary type '\@glo@type' has not been defined}{%
+You need to define a new glossary type, before making entries
+in it}}{%
+\protected@edef\@glolist@{\csname glolist@\@glo@type\endcsname}%
+\expandafter\xdef\csname glolist@\@glo@type\endcsname{\@glolist@{#1},}%
+}%
+\expandafter\protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@text\endcsname{\@glo@text}%
+\expandafter\protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@plural\endcsname{\@glo@plural}%
+\expandafter\protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@first\endcsname{\@glo@first}%
+\expandafter\protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@firstpl\endcsname{\@glo@firstplural}%
+\expandafter\protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@type\endcsname{\@glo@type}%
+\expandafter\protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@counter\endcsname{\@glo@counter}%
+\@gls@sanitizename
+\expandafter\protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@name\endcsname{\@glo@name}%
+\@gls@sanitizedesc
+\expandafter\protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@desc\endcsname{\@glo@desc}%
+\expandafter\protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@sort\endcsname{\@glo@sort}%
+\@gls@sanitizesymbol
+\expandafter\protected@xdef\csname glo@#1@symbol\endcsname{\@glo@symbol}%
+\expandafter\gdef\csname glo@#1@flagfalse\endcsname{%
+\expandafter\global\expandafter
+\let\csname ifglo@#1@flag\endcsname\iffalse}
+\expandafter\gdef\csname glo@#1@flagtrue\endcsname{%
+\expandafter\global\expandafter
+\let\csname ifglo@#1@flag\endcsname\iftrue}
+\csname glo@#1@flagfalse\endcsname
+}}
+\@onlypreamble{\newglossaryentry}
+\newcommand*{\glsreset}[1]{%
+\glsdoifexists{#1}{%
+\expandafter\global\csname glo@#1@flagfalse\endcsname}}
+\newcommand*{\glslocalreset}[1]{%
+\glsdoifexists{#1}{%
+\expandafter\let\csname ifglo@#1@flag\endcsname\iffalse}}
+\newcommand*{\glsunset}[1]{%
+\glsdoifexists{#1}{%
+\expandafter\global\csname glo@#1@flagtrue\endcsname}}
+\newcommand*{\glslocalunset}[1]{%
+\glsdoifexists{#1}{%
+\expandafter\let\csname ifglo@#1@flag\endcsname\iftrue}}
+\newcommand*{\glsresetall}[1][\@glo@types]{%
+\forallglsentries[#1]{\@glsentry}{%
+\glsreset{\@glsentry}}}
+\newcommand*{\glslocalresetall}[1][\@glo@types]{%
+\forallglsentries[#1]{\@glsentry}{%
+\glslocalreset{\@glsentry}}}
+\newcommand*{\glsunsetall}[1][\@glo@types]{%
+\forallglsentries[#1]{\@glsentry}{%
+\glsunset{\@glsentry}}}
+\newcommand*{\glslocalunsetall}[1][\@glo@types]{%
+\forallglsentries[#1]{\@glsentry}{%
+\glslocalunset{\@glsentry}}}
+\newcommand*{\loadglsentries}[2][\@gls@default]{%
+\let\@gls@default\glsdefaulttype
+\def\glsdefaulttype{#1}\input{#2}%
+\let\glsdefaulttype\@gls@default}
+\@onlypreamble{\loadglsentries}
+\newcommand*{\glsdisplayfirst}[4]{#1#4}
+\newcommand*{\glsdisplay}[4]{#1#4}
+\newcommand*{\defglsdisplay}[2][\glsdefaulttype]{%
+\expandafter\def\csname gls@#1@display\endcsname##1##2##3##4{#2}}
+\newcommand*{\defglsdisplayfirst}[2][\glsdefaulttype]{%
+\expandafter\def\csname gls@#1@displayfirst\endcsname##1##2##3##4{#2}}
+\define@key{glslink}{counter}{%
+\@ifundefined{c@#1}{\PackageError{glossaries}{There is no counter
+called `#1'}{The counter key should have the name of a valid
+counter as its value}}{%
+\def\@gls@counter{#1}}}
+\define@key{glslink}{format}{%
+\def\@glsnumberformat{#1}}
+\define@boolkey{glslink}{hyper}[true]{}
+\newcommand{\glslink}{%
+\@ifstar\@sgls@link\@gls@link}
+\newcommand*{\@sgls@link}[1][]{\@gls@link[hyper=false,#1]}
+\newcommand*{\@gls@link}[3][]{%
+\glsdoifexists{#2}{%
+\def\@glsnumberformat{glsnumberformat}%
+\edef\@gls@counter{\csname glo@#2@counter\endcsname}%
+\KV@glslink@hypertrue
+\setkeys{glslink}{#1}%
+\edef\theglsentrycounter{\csname the\@gls@counter\endcsname}%
+\ifKV@glslink@hyper
+\@glslink{glo:#2}{#3}%
+\else
+#3\relax
+\fi
+\protected@edef\@glo@sort{\csname glo@#2@sort\endcsname}%
+\@gls@checkmkidxchars\@glo@sort
+\protected@edef\@@glo@name{\csname glo@#2@name\endcsname}%
+\@gls@checkmkidxchars\@@glo@name
+\protected@edef\@glo@name{\string\glsnamefont{\@@glo@name}}%
+\protected@edef\@glo@desc{\csname glo@#2@desc\endcsname}%
+\@gls@checkmkidxchars\@glo@desc
+\protected@edef\@glo@symbol{\csname glo@#2@symbol\endcsname}%
+\@gls@checkmkidxchars\@glo@symbol
+\protected@edef\@glo@numfmt{setentrycounter{\@gls@counter}%
+\expandafter\string\csname\@glsnumberformat\endcsname}%
+\@gls@checkmkidxchars\@glo@numfmt
+\glossary[\csname glo@#2@type\endcsname]{%
+\@glo@sort\@gls@actualchar
+\string\glossaryentryfield{#2}{\@glo@name}{\@glo@desc
+}{\@glo@symbol}\@gls@encapchar\@glo@numfmt}%
+}}
+\newcommand{\@gls@checkmkidxchars}[1]{%
+\def\@gls@checkedmkidx{}%
+\expandafter\@gls@checkquote#1\@nil""\null%
+\expandafter\@gls@updatechecked\@gls@checkedmkidx{#1}%
+\def\@gls@checkedmkidx{}%
+\expandafter\@gls@checkescquote#1\@nil\"\"\null%
+\expandafter\@gls@updatechecked\@gls@checkedmkidx{#1}%
+\def\@gls@checkedmkidx{}%
+\expandafter\@gls@checkescactual#1\@nil\?\?\null%
+\expandafter\@gls@updatechecked\@gls@checkedmkidx{#1}%
+\def\@gls@checkedmkidx{}%
+\expandafter\@gls@checkactual#1\@nil??\null%
+\expandafter\@gls@updatechecked\@gls@checkedmkidx{#1}%
+\def\@gls@checkedmkidx{}%
+\expandafter\@gls@checkbar#1\@nil||\null%
+\expandafter\@gls@updatechecked\@gls@checkedmkidx{#1}%
+\def\@gls@checkedmkidx{}%
+\expandafter\@gls@checkescbar#1\@nil\|\|\null%
+\expandafter\@gls@updatechecked\@gls@checkedmkidx{#1}%
+\def\@gls@checkedmkidx{}%
+\expandafter\@gls@checklevel#1\@nil!!\null%
+\expandafter\@gls@updatechecked\@gls@checkedmkidx{#1}%
+}
+\def\@gls@updatechecked#1\@nil#2{\def#2{#1}}
+\toksdef\@gls@tmpb=2
+\def\@gls@checkquote#1"#2"#3\null{%
+\@gls@tmpb=\expandafter{\@gls@checkedmkidx}%
+\toks@={#1}%
+\ifx\null#2\null%
+ \ifx\null#3\null
+  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@}%
+  \def\@@gls@checkquote{\relax}%
+ \else
+  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
+    \@gls@quotechar\@gls@quotechar\@gls@quotechar\@gls@quotechar}%
+  \def\@@gls@checkquote{\@gls@checkquote#3\null}%
+ \fi
+\else
+ \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
+   \@gls@quotechar\@gls@quotechar}%
+ \ifx\null#3\null
+   \def\@@gls@checkquote{\@gls@checkquote#2""\null}%
+ \else
+   \def\@@gls@checkquote{\@gls@checkquote#2"#3\null}%
+ \fi
+\fi
+\@@gls@checkquote}
+\def\@gls@checkescquote#1\"#2\"#3\null{%
+\@gls@tmpb=\expandafter{\@gls@checkedmkidx}%
+\toks@={#1}%
+\ifx\null#2\null%
+ \ifx\null#3\null
+  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@}%
+  \def\@@gls@checkescquote{\relax}%
+ \else
+  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
+    \@gls@quotechar\string\"\@gls@quotechar
+    \@gls@quotechar\string\"\@gls@quotechar}%
+  \def\@@gls@checkescquote{\@gls@checkescquote#3\null}%
+ \fi
+\else
+ \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
+   \@gls@quotechar\string\"\@gls@quotechar}%
+ \ifx\null#3\null
+   \def\@@gls@checkescquote{\@gls@checkescquote#2\"\"\null}%
+ \else
+   \def\@@gls@checkescquote{\@gls@checkescquote#2\"#3\null}%
+ \fi
+\fi
+\@@gls@checkescquote}
+\def\@gls@checkescactual#1\?#2\?#3\null{%
+\@gls@tmpb=\expandafter{\@gls@checkedmkidx}%
+\toks@={#1}%
+\ifx\null#2\null%
+ \ifx\null#3\null
+  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@}%
+  \def\@@gls@checkescactual{\relax}%
+ \else
+  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
+    \@gls@quotechar\string\"\@gls@actualchar
+    \@gls@quotechar\string\"\@gls@actualchar}%
+  \def\@@gls@checkescactual{\@gls@checkescactual#3\null}%
+ \fi
+\else
+ \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
+   \@gls@quotechar\string\"\@gls@actualchar}%
+ \ifx\null#3\null
+  \def\@@gls@checkescactual{\@gls@checkescactual#2\?\?\null}%
+ \else
+  \def\@@gls@checkescactual{\@gls@checkescactual#2\?#3\null}%
+ \fi
+\fi
+\@@gls@checkescactual}
+\def\@gls@checkescbar#1\|#2\|#3\null{%
+\@gls@tmpb=\expandafter{\@gls@checkedmkidx}%
+\toks@={#1}%
+\ifx\null#2\null%
+ \ifx\null#3\null
+  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@}%
+  \def\@@gls@checkescbar{\relax}%
+ \else
+  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
+    \@gls@quotechar\string\"\@gls@encapchar
+    \@gls@quotechar\string\"\@gls@encapchar}%
+  \def\@@gls@checkescbar{\@gls@checkescbar#3\null}%
+ \fi
+\else
+ \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
+   \@gls@quotechar\string\"\@gls@encapchar}%
+ \ifx\null#3\null
+  \def\@@gls@checkescbar{\@gls@checkescbar#2\|\|\null}%
+ \else
+  \def\@@gls@checkescbar{\@gls@checkescbar#2\|#3\null}%
+ \fi
+\fi
+\@@gls@checkescbar}
+\def\@gls@checkesclevel#1\!#2\!#3\null{%
+\@gls@tmpb=\expandafter{\@gls@checkedmkidx}%
+\toks@={#1}%
+\ifx\null#2\null%
+ \ifx\null#3\null
+  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@}%
+  \def\@@gls@checkesclevel{\relax}%
+ \else
+  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
+    \@gls@quotechar\string\"\@gls@levelchar
+    \@gls@quotechar\string\"\@gls@levelchar}%
+  \def\@@gls@checkesclevel{\@gls@checkesclevel#3\null}%
+ \fi
+\else
+ \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
+   \@gls@quotechar\string\"\@gls@levelchar}%
+ \ifx\null#3\null
+  \def\@@gls@checkesclevel{\@gls@checkesclevel#2\!\!\null}%
+ \else
+  \def\@@gls@checkesclevel{\@gls@checkesclevel#2\!#3\null}%
+ \fi
+\fi
+\@@gls@checkesclevel}
+\def\@gls@checkbar#1|#2|#3\null{%
+\@gls@tmpb=\expandafter{\@gls@checkedmkidx}%
+\toks@={#1}%
+\ifx\null#2\null%
+ \ifx\null#3\null
+  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@}%
+  \def\@@gls@checkbar{\relax}%
+ \else
+  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
+    \@gls@quotechar\@gls@encapchar\@gls@quotechar\@gls@encapchar}%
+  \def\@@gls@checkbar{\@gls@checkbar#3\null}%
+ \fi
+\else
+ \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
+   \@gls@quotechar\@gls@encapchar}%
+ \ifx\null#3\null
+   \def\@@gls@checkbar{\@gls@checkbar#2||\null}%
+ \else
+   \def\@@gls@checkbar{\@gls@checkbar#2|#3\null}%
+ \fi
+\fi
+\@@gls@checkbar}
+\def\@gls@checklevel#1!#2!#3\null{%
+\@gls@tmpb=\expandafter{\@gls@checkedmkidx}%
+\toks@={#1}%
+\ifx\null#2\null%
+ \ifx\null#3\null
+  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@}%
+  \def\@@gls@checklevel{\relax}%
+ \else
+  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
+    \@gls@quotechar\@gls@levelchar\@gls@quotechar\@gls@levelchar}%
+  \def\@@gls@checklevel{\@gls@checklevel#3\null}%
+ \fi
+\else
+ \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
+   \@gls@quotechar\@gls@levelchar}%
+ \ifx\null#3\null
+   \def\@@gls@checklevel{\@gls@checklevel#2!!\null}%
+ \else
+   \def\@@gls@checklevel{\@gls@checklevel#2!#3\null}%
+ \fi
+\fi
+\@@gls@checklevel}
+\def\@gls@checkactual#1?#2?#3\null{%
+\@gls@tmpb=\expandafter{\@gls@checkedmkidx}%
+\toks@={#1}%
+\ifx\null#2\null%
+ \ifx\null#3\null
+  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@}%
+  \def\@@gls@checkactual{\relax}%
+ \else
+  \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
+    \@gls@quotechar\@gls@actualchar\@gls@quotechar\@gls@actualchar}%
+  \def\@@gls@checkactual{\@gls@checkactual#3\null}%
+ \fi
+\else
+ \edef\@gls@checkedmkidx{\the\@gls@tmpb\the\toks@
+   \@gls@quotechar\@gls@actualchar}%
+ \ifx\null#3\null
+   \def\@@gls@checkactual{\@gls@checkactual#2??\null}%
+ \else
+   \def\@@gls@checkactual{\@gls@checkactual#2?#3\null}%
+ \fi
+\fi
+\@@gls@checkactual}
+\@ifundefined{hyperlink}{%
+\gdef\@glslink#1#2{#2}\gdef\@glstarget#1#2{#2}%
+}{\gdef\@glslink#1#2{\hyperlink{#1}{#2}}%
+\gdef\@glstarget#1#2{\hypertarget{#1}{#2}}}
+\newcommand{\glsdisablehyper}{%
+\renewcommand*\@glslink[2]{##2}%
+\renewcommand*\@glstarget[2]{##2}}
+\newcommand{\glsenablehyper}{%
+\renewcommand*\@glslink[2]{\hyperlink{##1}{##2}}%
+\renewcommand*\@glstarget[2]{\hypertarget{##1}{##2}}}
+\newcommand*{\gls}{\@ifstar\@sgls\@gls}
+\newcommand*{\@sgls}[1][]{\@gls[hyper=false,#1]}
+\newcommand*{\@gls}[2][]{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\@gls@{#1}{#2}}{\@gls@{#1}{#2}[]}}
+\def\@gls@#1#2[#3]{%
+\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
+\ifglsused{#2}{\protected@edef\@glo@text{%
+\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname
+{\glsentrytext{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}{%
+\protected@edef\@glo@text{%
+\csname gls@\@glo@type @displayfirst\endcsname
+{\glsentryfirst{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}%
+\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}%
+\glsunset{#2}}%
+\xspace}
+\newcommand*{\Gls}{\@ifstar\@sGls\@Gls}
+\newcommand*{\@sGls}[1][]{\@Gls[hyper=false,#1]}
+\newcommand*{\@Gls}[2][]{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\@Gls@{#1}{#2}}{\@Gls@{#1}{#2}[]}}
+\def\@Gls@#1#2[#3]{%
+\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
+\ifglsused{#2}{\protected@edef\@glo@text{%
+\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname
+{\glsentrytext{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}{%
+\protected@edef\@glo@text{%
+\csname gls@\@glo@type @displayfirst\endcsname
+{\glsentryfirst{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}%
+\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@glo@text}%
+\glsunset{#2}}%
+\xspace}
+\newcommand*{\GLS}{\@ifstar\@sGLS\@GLS}
+\newcommand*{\@sGLS}[1][]{\@GLS[hyper=false,#1]}
+\newcommand*{\@GLS}[2][]{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\@GLS@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLS@{#1}{#2}[]}}
+\def\@GLS@#1#2[#3]{%
+\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
+\ifglsused{#2}{\protected@edef\@glo@text{%
+\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname
+{\glsentrytext{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}{%
+\protected@edef\@glo@text{%
+\csname gls@\@glo@type @displayfirst\endcsname
+{\glsentryfirst{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}%
+\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}%
+\glsunset{#2}}%
+\xspace}
+\newcommand*{\glspl}{\@ifstar\@sglspl\@glspl}
+\newcommand*{\@sglspl}[1][]{\@glspl[hyper=false,#1]}
+\newcommand*{\@glspl}[2][]{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\@glspl@{#1}{#2}}{\@glspl@{#1}{#2}[]}}
+\def\@glspl@#1#2[#3]{%
+\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
+\ifglsused{#2}{\protected@edef\@glo@text{%
+\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname
+{\glsentryplural{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}{%
+\protected@edef\@glo@text{%
+\csname gls@\@glo@type @displayfirst\endcsname
+{\glsentryfirstplural{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}%
+\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\@glo@text}%
+\glsunset{#2}}%
+\xspace}
+\newcommand*{\Glspl}{\@ifstar\@sGlspl\@Glspl}
+\newcommand*{\@sGlspl}[1][]{\@Glspl[hyper=false,#1]}
+\newcommand*{\@Glspl}[2][]{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\@Glspl@{#1}{#2}}{\@Glspl@{#1}{#2}[]}}
+\def\@Glspl@#1#2[#3]{%
+\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
+\ifglsused{#2}{\protected@edef\@glo@text{%
+\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname
+{\glsentryplural{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}{%
+\protected@edef\@glo@text{%
+\csname gls@\@glo@type @displayfirst\endcsname
+{\glsentryfirstplural{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}%
+\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@glo@text}%
+\glsunset{#2}}%
+\xspace}
+\newcommand*{\GLSpl}{\@ifstar\@sGLSpl\@GLSpl}
+\newcommand*{\@sGLSpl}[1][]{\@GLSpl[hyper=false,#1]}
+\newcommand*{\@GLSpl}[2][]{%
+\@ifnextchar[{\@GLSpl@{#1}{#2}}{\@GLSpl@{#1}{#2}[]}}
+\def\@GLSpl@#1#2[#3]{%
+\glsdoifexists{#2}{\edef\@glo@type{\glsentrytype{#2}}%
+\ifglsused{#2}{\protected@edef\@glo@text{%
+\csname gls@\@glo@type @display\endcsname
+{\glsentryplural{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}{%
+\protected@edef\@glo@text{%
+\csname gls@\@glo@type @displayfirst\endcsname
+{\glsentryfirstplural{#2}}{\glsentrydesc{#2}}{\glsentrysymbol{#2}}{#3}}}%
+\@gls@link[#1]{#2}{\MakeUppercase{\@glo@text}}%
+\glsunset{#2}}%
+\xspace}
+\newcommand*{\glsentryname}[1]{\csname glo@#1@name\endcsname}
+\newcommand*{\Glsentryname}[1]{\expandafter
+\MakeUppercase\csname glo@#1@name\endcsname}
+\newcommand*{\glsentrydesc}[1]{\csname glo@#1@desc\endcsname}
+\newcommand*{\Glsentrydesc}[1]{\expandafter
+\MakeUppercase\csname glo@#1@desc\endcsname}
+\newcommand*{\glsentrytext}[1]{\csname glo@#1@text\endcsname}
+\newcommand*{\Glsentrytext}[1]{\expandafter
+\MakeUppercase\csname glo@#1@text\endcsname}
+\newcommand*{\glsentryplural}[1]{\csname glo@#1@plural\endcsname}
+\newcommand*{\Glsentryplural}[1]{\expandafter
+\MakeUppercase\csname glo@#1@plural\endcsname}
+\newcommand*{\glsentrysymbol}[1]{\csname glo@#1@symbol\endcsname}
+\newcommand*{\Glsentrysymbol}[1]{\expandafter
+\MakeUppercase\csname glo@#1@symbol\endcsname}
+\newcommand*{\glsentryfirst}[1]{\csname glo@#1@first\endcsname}
+\newcommand*{\Glsentryfirst}[1]{\expandafter
+\MakeUppercase\csname glo@#1@first\endcsname}
+\newcommand*{\glsentryfirstplural}[1]{%
+\csname glo@#1@firstpl\endcsname}
+\newcommand*{\Glsentryfirstplural}[1]{%
+\expandafter\MakeUppercase\csname glo@#1@firstpl\endcsname}
+\newcommand*{\glsentrytype}[1]{\csname glo@#1@type\endcsname}
+\newcommand*{\glsentrysort}[1]{\csname glo@#1@sort\endcsname}
+\define@key{glossadd}{counter}{\def\@glo@counter{#1}}
+\define@key{glossadd}{format}{\def\@glo@format{#1}}
+\define@key{glossadd}{types}{\def\@glo@type{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\glsadd}[2][]{%
+\glsdoifexists{#2}{%
+\def\@glo@format{glsnumberformat}%
+\edef\@glo@counter{\csname glo@#2@counter\endcsname}%
+\setkeys{glossadd}{#1}%
+\edef\theglsentrycounter{\csname the\@glo@counter\endcsname}%
+\protected@edef\@glo@sort{\csname glo@#2@sort\endcsname}%
+\@gls@checkmkidxchars\@glo@sort
+\protected@edef\@@glo@name{\csname glo@#2@name\endcsname}%
+\@gls@checkmkidxchars\@@glo@name
+\protected@edef\@glo@name{\string\glsnamefont{\@@glo@name}}%
+\protected@edef\@glo@desc{\csname glo@#2@desc\endcsname}%
+\@gls@checkmkidxchars\@glo@desc
+\protected@edef\@glo@symbol{\csname glo@#2@symbol\endcsname}%
+\@gls@checkmkidxchars\@glo@symbol
+\protected@edef\@glo@numfmt{setentrycounter{\@glo@counter}%
+\expandafter\string\csname\@glo@format\endcsname}%
+\@gls@checkmkidxchars\@glo@numfmt
+\glossary[\csname glo@#2@type\endcsname]{%
+\@glo@sort\@gls@actualchar\string\glossaryentryfield
+{#2}{\@glo@name}{\@glo@desc}{\@glo@symbol}\@gls@encapchar
+\@glo@numfmt}%
+}}
+\newcommand*{\glsaddall}[1][]{%
+\def\@glo@type{\@glo@types}%
+\setkeys{glossadd}{#1}%
+\forallglsentries[\@glo@type]{\@glo@entry}{%
+\glsadd[#1]{\@glo@entry}}%
+}
+\newwrite\istfile
+\bgroup
+\catcode`\%12\relax
+\catcode`\"12\relax
+\catcode`\|12\relax
+\catcode`\!12\relax
+\catcode`\?12\relax
+\gdef\@gls@actualchar{?}
+\gdef\@gls@encapchar{|}
+\gdef\@gls@levelchar{!}
+\gdef\@gls@quotechar{"}
+\gdef\writeist{\relax
+\protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\@istfilename{\istfilename}}
+\openout\istfile=\istfilename
+\write\istfile{% makeindex style file created by the glossaries package}
+\write\istfile{% for document '\jobname' on \the\year-\the\month-\the\day}
+\write\istfile{actual '\@gls@actualchar'}
+\write\istfile{encap '\@gls@encapchar'}
+\write\istfile{level '\@gls@levelchar'}
+\write\istfile{quote '\@gls@quotechar'}
+\write\istfile{keyword "\string\\glossaryentry"}
+\write\istfile{preamble "\string\\glossarysection[\string\\glossarytoctitle]{\string\\glossarytitle}\string\\glossarypreamble\string\n\string\\begin{theglossary}\string\\glossaryheader\string\n"}
+\write\istfile{postamble "\string\n\string\\end{theglossary}\string\n\string\\glossarypostamble\string\n"}
+\write\istfile{group_skip "\string\\glsgroupskip\string\n"}
+\write\istfile{item_0 "\string\n"}
+\write\istfile{delim_0 "\{\string\\glossaryentrynumbers\{\string\\relax"}
+\write\istfile{delim_t "\}\}"}
+\write\istfile{delim_n "\string\\delimN"}
+\write\istfile{delim_r "\string\\delimR"}
+\write\istfile{headings_flag 1}
+\write\istfile{heading_prefix "\string\\glsgroupheading\{"}
+\write\istfile{heading_suffix "\}"}
+\write\istfile{symhead_positive "glssymbols"}
+\write\istfile{numhead_positive "glsnumbers"}
+\write\istfile{page_compositor "\glscompositor"}
+\noist}
+\egroup
+\newcommand{\noist}{\let\writeist\relax}
+\newcommand*{\@makeglossary}[1]{%
+\ifglossaryexists{#1}{%
+\edef\glo@out{\csname @glotype@#1@out\endcsname}%
+\expandafter\newwrite\csname glo@#1@file\endcsname
+\edef\@glo@file{\csname glo@#1@file\endcsname}%
+\immediate\openout\@glo@file=\jobname.\glo@out
+\@gls@renewglossary
+\PackageInfo{glossaries}{Writing glossary file \jobname.\glo@out}
+\writeist
+}{\PackageError{glossaries}{%
+Glossary type `#1' not defined}{New glossaries must be defined before
+using \string\makeglossary}}}
+\newcommand*{\makeglossaries}{%
+\@for\@glo@type:=\@glo@types\do{%
+\ifthenelse{\equal{\@glo@type}{}}{}{%
+\@makeglossary{\@glo@type}}}%
+\renewcommand*\newglossary[4][]{%
+\PackageError{glossaries}{New glossaries
+must be created before \string\makeglossaries}{You need
+to move \string\makeglossaries\space after all your
+\string\newglossary\space commands}}%
+\let\@makeglossary\empty
+\let\makeglossary\empty}
+\let\makeglossary\makeglossaries
+\renewcommand*{\glossary}[1][\glsdefaulttype]{%
+\@glossary[#1]}
+\def\@glossary[#1]{\@bsphack\begingroup\@sanitize\@index}
+\newcommand{\@gls@renewglossary}{%
+\gdef\@glossary[##1]{\@bsphack\begingroup\@wrglossary{##1}}%
+\let\@gls@renewglossary\@empty
+}
+\renewcommand*{\@wrglossary}[2]{%
+\expandafter\protected@write\csname glo@#1@file\endcsname{}{%
+\string\glossaryentry{#2}{\theglsentrycounter}}\endgroup\@esphack}
+\newcommand*{\printglossary}[1][type=\glsdefaulttype]{%
+\def\@glo@type{\glsdefaulttype}%
+\def\glossarytitle{\csname @glotype@\@glo@type @title\endcsname}%
+\def\glossarytoctitle{\glossarytitle}%
+\def\@glossarystyle{}%
+\setkeys{printgloss}{#1}%
+\bgroup
+\@glossarystyle
+\makeatletter
+\@input@{\jobname.\csname @glotype@\@glo@type @in\endcsname}%
+\egroup
+}
+\newcommand*{\printglossaries}{%
+\forallglossaries{\@@glo@type}{\printglossary[type=\@@glo@type]}}
+\define@key{printgloss}{type}{\def\@glo@type{#1}}
+\define@key{printgloss}{title}{\def\glossarytitle{#1}}
+\define@key{printgloss}{toctitle}{\def\glossarytoctitle{#1}}
+\define@key{printgloss}{style}{%
+\@ifundefined{@glsstyle@#1}{\PackageError{glossaries}{Glossary
+style `#1' undefined}{}}{%
+\def\@glossarystyle{\csname @glsstyle@#1\endcsname}}}
+\@ifundefined{theglossary}{%
+\newenvironment{theglossary}{}{}}{%
+\PackageWarning{glossaries}{overriding `theglossary' environment}%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{}{}}
+\newcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}
+\newcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
+\@glstarget{glo:#1}{#2} #4 #3. #5\par}
+\newcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{}
+\newcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}
+\newcommand*{\glsgetgrouptitle}[1]{%
+\@ifundefined{#1groupname}{#1}{\csname #1groupname\endcsname}}
+\newcommand*{\glsgetgrouplabel}[1]{%
+\ifthenelse{\equals{#1}{\glssymbolsgroupname}}{glssymbols}{%
+\ifthenelse{\equals{#1}{\glsnumbersgroupname}}{glsnumbers}{#1}}}
+\newcommand*{\setentrycounter}[1]{\def\glsentrycounter{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\glossarystyle}[1]{%
+\@ifundefined{@glsstyle@#1}{\PackageError{glossaries}{Glossary
+style `#1' undefined}{}}{%
+\csname @glsstyle@#1\endcsname}}
+\newcommand*{\newglossarystyle}[2]{%
+\@ifundefined{@glsstyle@#1}{%
+\expandafter\def\csname @glsstyle@#1\endcsname{#2}}{%
+\PackageError{glossaries}{Glossary style `#1' is already defined}{}}}
+\newcommand*{\glsnamefont}[1]{#1}
+\@ifundefined{hyperlink}{%
+\def\glshypernumber#1{#1}}{%
+\def\glshypernumber#1{%
+\@delimR#1\delimR\delimR\\}}
+\def\@delimR#1\delimR #2\delimR #3\\{%
+\ifx\\#2\\%
+  \@delimN{#1}%
+\else
+  \@gls@numberlink{#1}\delimR\@gls@numberlink{#2}%
+\fi}
+\def\@delimN#1{\@@delimN#1\delimN \delimN\\}
+\def\@@delimN#1\delimN #2\delimN#3\\{%
+\ifx\\#3\\%
+  \@gls@numberlink{#1}%
+\else
+  \@gls@numberlink{#1}\delimN\@gls@numberlink{#2}%
+\fi
+}
+\def\@gls@numberlink#1{%
+\begingroup
+ \toks@={}%
+ \@gls@removespaces#1 \@nil
+\endgroup}
+\def\@gls@removespaces#1 #2\@nil{%
+ \toks@=\expandafter{\the\toks@#1}%
+ \ifx\\#2\\%
+   \edef\x{\the\toks@}%
+   \ifx\x\empty
+   \else
+     \hyperlink{\glsentrycounter.\the\toks@}{\the\toks@}%
+   \fi
+ \else
+   \@gls@ReturnAfterFi{%
+     \@gls@removespaces#2\@nil
+   }%
+ \fi
+}
+\long\def\@gls@ReturnAfterFi#1\fi{\fi#1}
+\newcommand*{\hyperrm}[1]{\textrm{\glshypernumber{#1}}}
+\newcommand*{\hypersf}[1]{\textsf{\glshypernumber{#1}}}
+\newcommand*{\hypertt}[1]{\texttt{\glshypernumber{#1}}}
+\newcommand*{\hyperbf}[1]{\textbf{\glshypernumber{#1}}}
+\newcommand*{\hypermd}[1]{\textmd{\glshypernumber{#1}}}
+\newcommand*{\hyperit}[1]{\textit{\glshypernumber{#1}}}
+\newcommand*{\hypersl}[1]{\textsl{\glshypernumber{#1}}}
+\newcommand*{\hyperup}[1]{\textup{\glshypernumber{#1}}}
+\newcommand*{\hypersc}[1]{\textsc{\glshypernumber{#1}}}
+\newcommand*{\hyperemph}[1]{\emph{\glshypernumber{#1}}}
+\ifglsacronym
+\newglossary[alg]{acronym}{acr}{acn}{\acronymname}
+\renewcommand{\acronymtype}{acronym}
+\defglsdisplay[acronym]{#1#4}\defglsdisplayfirst[acronym]{#1#4}
+\fi
+\newcommand{\newacronym}[4][]{%
+\newglossaryentry{#2}{type=\acronymtype,
+name={#3},description={#4},text={#3},
+first={#4 (#3)},plural={#3s},firstplural={#4s (#3s)},#1}}
+\@onlypreamble{\newacronym}
+\RequirePackage{glossary-hypernav}
+\RequirePackage{glossary-list}
+\RequirePackage{glossary-long}
+\RequirePackage{glossary-super}
+\glossarystyle{\@glossary@default@style}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `glossaries.sty'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossary-hypernav.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossary-hypernav.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3b61b9c3880
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossary-hypernav.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `glossary-hypernav.sty',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% glossaries.dtx  (with options: `glossary-hypernav.sty,package')
+%% Copyright (C) 2007 Nicola Talbot, all rights reserved.
+%% If you modify this file, you must change its name first.
+%% You are NOT ALLOWED to distribute this file alone. You are NOT
+%% ALLOWED to take money for the distribution or use of either this
+%% file or a changed version, except for a nominal charge for copying
+%% etc.
+%% \CharacterTable
+%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+\ProvidesPackage{glossary-hypernav}[2007/05/16 v1.0 (NLCT)]
+\@ifundefined{hyperlink}{%
+\newcommand*{\glsnavhyperlink}[3][]{#3}}{%
+\newcommand*{\glsnavhyperlink}[3][\@glo@type]{%
+\edef\gls@grplabel{#2}\edef\@gls@grptitle{#3}%
+\hyperlink{glsn:#1@#2}{#3}}}
+\@ifundefined{hypertarget}{%
+\newcommand*{\glsnavhypertarget}[3][]{#3}}{%
+\newcommand*{\glsnavhypertarget}[3][\@glo@type]{%
+\hypertarget{glsn:#1@#2}{#3}}}
+\newcommand*{\glsnavigation}{%
+\glssymbolnav
+\glsnavhyperlink{A}{\glsgetgrouptitle{A}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{B}{\glsgetgrouptitle{B}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{C}{\glsgetgrouptitle{C}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{D}{\glsgetgrouptitle{D}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{E}{\glsgetgrouptitle{E}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{F}{\glsgetgrouptitle{F}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{G}{\glsgetgrouptitle{G}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{H}{\glsgetgrouptitle{H}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{I}{\glsgetgrouptitle{I}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{J}{\glsgetgrouptitle{J}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{K}{\glsgetgrouptitle{K}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{L}{\glsgetgrouptitle{L}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{M}{\glsgetgrouptitle{M}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{N}{\glsgetgrouptitle{N}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{O}{\glsgetgrouptitle{O}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{P}{\glsgetgrouptitle{P}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{Q}{\glsgetgrouptitle{Q}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{R}{\glsgetgrouptitle{R}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{S}{\glsgetgrouptitle{S}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{T}{\glsgetgrouptitle{T}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{U}{\glsgetgrouptitle{U}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{V}{\glsgetgrouptitle{V}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{W}{\glsgetgrouptitle{W}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{X}{\glsgetgrouptitle{X}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{Y}{\glsgetgrouptitle{Y}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{Z}{\glsgetgrouptitle{Z}}}
+\newcommand*{\glssymbolnav}{%
+\glsnavhyperlink{glssymbols}{\glsgetgrouptitle{glssymbols}} \textbar\
+\glsnavhyperlink{glsnumbers}{\glsgetgrouptitle{glsnumbers}} \textbar\
+}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `glossary-hypernav.sty'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossary-list.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossary-list.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f175c92300f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossary-list.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `glossary-list.sty',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% glossaries.dtx  (with options: `glossary-list.sty,package')
+%% Copyright (C) 2007 Nicola Talbot, all rights reserved.
+%% If you modify this file, you must change its name first.
+%% You are NOT ALLOWED to distribute this file alone. You are NOT
+%% ALLOWED to take money for the distribution or use of either this
+%% file or a changed version, except for a nominal charge for copying
+%% etc.
+%% \CharacterTable
+%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+\ProvidesPackage{glossary-list}[2007/05/16 v1.0 (NLCT)]
+\newglossarystyle{list}{%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{\begin{description}}{\end{description}}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}%
+\renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
+\item[\@glstarget{glo:##1}{##2}] ##3. ##5}%
+\renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{\indexspace}}
+\newglossarystyle{listgroup}{%
+\glossarystyle{list}%
+\renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{\item[##1]}}
+\newglossarystyle{listhypergroup}{%
+\glossarystyle{list}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{%
+\item[]\glsnavigation}%
+\renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{%
+\item[\glsnavhypertarget{##1}{\glsgetgrouptitle{##1}}]}}
+\newglossarystyle{altlist}{%
+\glossarystyle{list}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
+\item[\@glstarget{glo:##1}{##2}]\mbox{}\newline ##3. ##5}%
+}
+\newglossarystyle{altlistgroup}{%
+\glossarystyle{altlist}%
+\renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{\item[##1]}}
+\newglossarystyle{altlisthypergroup}{%
+\glossarystyle{altlist}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{%
+\item[]\glsnavigation}%
+\renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{%
+\item[\glsnavhypertarget{##1}{\glsgetgrouptitle{##1}}]}}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `glossary-list.sty'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossary-long.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossary-long.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0800c24419d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossary-long.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,124 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `glossary-long.sty',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% glossaries.dtx  (with options: `glossary-long.sty,package')
+%% Copyright (C) 2007 Nicola Talbot, all rights reserved.
+%% If you modify this file, you must change its name first.
+%% You are NOT ALLOWED to distribute this file alone. You are NOT
+%% ALLOWED to take money for the distribution or use of either this
+%% file or a changed version, except for a nominal charge for copying
+%% etc.
+%% \CharacterTable
+%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+\ProvidesPackage{glossary-long}[2007/05/16 v1.0 (NLCT)]
+\RequirePackage{longtable}
+\newlength\glsdescwidth
+\newlength\glspagelistwidth
+\setlength{\glsdescwidth}{0.6\linewidth}
+\setlength{\glspagelistwidth}{0.1\linewidth}
+\newglossarystyle{long}{%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{\begin{longtable}{lp{\glsdescwidth}}}{%
+\end{longtable}}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}%
+\renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
+\@glstarget{glo:##1}{##2} & ##3. ##5\\}%
+\renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{ & \\}}
+\newglossarystyle{longborder}{%
+\glossarystyle{long}%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+\begin{longtable}{|l|p{\glsdescwidth}|}}{\end{longtable}}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{\hline\endhead\hline\endfoot}%
+}
+\newglossarystyle{longheader}{%
+\glossarystyle{long}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{%
+\bfseries \entryname & \bfseries \descriptionname\\
+\endhead}}
+\newglossarystyle{longheaderborder}{%
+\glossarystyle{longborder}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{%
+\hline\bfseries \entryname & \bfseries \descriptionname\\\hline
+\endhead
+\hline\endfoot}}
+\newglossarystyle{long3col}{%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{\begin{longtable}{lp{\glsdescwidth}p{\glspagelistwidth}}}{%
+\end{longtable}}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}%
+\renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
+\@glstarget{glo:##1}{##2} & ##3 & ##5\\}%
+\renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{ & &\\}}
+\newglossarystyle{long3colborder}{%
+\glossarystyle{long3col}%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+\begin{longtable}{|l|p{\glsdescwidth}|p{\glspagelistwidth}|}}{%
+\end{longtable}}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{\hline\endhead\hline\endfoot}%
+}
+\newglossarystyle{long3colheader}{%
+\glossarystyle{long3col}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{%
+\bfseries\entryname&\bfseries\descriptionname&
+\bfseries\pagelistname\\\endhead}%
+}
+\newglossarystyle{long3colheaderborder}{%
+\glossarystyle{long3colborder}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{%
+\hline
+\bfseries\entryname&\bfseries\descriptionname&
+\bfseries\pagelistname\\\hline\endhead
+\hline\endfoot}%
+}
+\newglossarystyle{long4col}{%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+\begin{longtable}{llll}}{%
+\end{longtable}}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}%
+\renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
+\@glstarget{glo:##1}{##2} & ##3 & ##4 & ##5\\}%
+\renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{ & & &\\}}
+\newglossarystyle{long4colheader}{%
+\glossarystyle{long4col}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{%
+\bfseries\entryname&\bfseries\descriptionname&
+\bfseries \symbolname&
+\bfseries\pagelistname\\\endhead}%
+}
+\newglossarystyle{long4colborder}{%
+\glossarystyle{long4col}%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+\begin{longtable}{|l|l|l|l|}}{%
+\end{longtable}}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{\hline\endhead\hline\endfoot}%
+}
+\newglossarystyle{long4colheaderborder}{%
+\glossarystyle{long4col}%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+\begin{longtable}{|l|l|l|l|}}{%
+\end{longtable}}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{%
+\hline\bfseries\entryname&\bfseries\descriptionname&
+\bfseries \symbolname&
+\bfseries\pagelistname\\\hline\endhead\hline\\\endfoot}%
+}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `glossary-long.sty'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossary-super.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossary-super.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..95143f9be2b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossary-super.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,133 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `glossary-super.sty',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% glossaries.dtx  (with options: `glossary-super.sty,package')
+%% Copyright (C) 2007 Nicola Talbot, all rights reserved.
+%% If you modify this file, you must change its name first.
+%% You are NOT ALLOWED to distribute this file alone. You are NOT
+%% ALLOWED to take money for the distribution or use of either this
+%% file or a changed version, except for a nominal charge for copying
+%% etc.
+%% \CharacterTable
+%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+\ProvidesPackage{glossary-super}[2007/05/16 v1.0 (NLCT)]
+\RequirePackage{supertabular}
+\newglossarystyle{super}{%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+\tablehead{}\tabletail{}%
+\begin{supertabular}{lp{\glsdescwidth}}}{%
+\end{supertabular}}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}%
+\renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
+\@glstarget{glo:##1}{##2} & ##3. ##5\\}%
+\renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{ & \\}}
+\newglossarystyle{superborder}{%
+\glossarystyle{super}%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+\tablehead{\hline}\tabletail{\hline}%
+\begin{supertabular}{|l|p{\glsdescwidth}|}}{\end{supertabular}}%
+}
+\newglossarystyle{superheader}{%
+\glossarystyle{super}%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+\tablehead{\bfseries \entryname & \bfseries \descriptionname\\}%
+\tabletail{}%
+\begin{supertabular}{lp{\glsdescwidth}}}{\end{supertabular}}%
+}
+\newglossarystyle{superheaderborder}{%
+\glossarystyle{super}%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+\tablehead{\hline\bfseries \entryname & \bfseries \descriptionname\\\hline}%
+\tabletail{\hline}
+\begin{supertabular}{|l|p{\glsdescwidth}|}}{\end{supertabular}}%
+}
+\newglossarystyle{super3col}{%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+\tablehead{}\tabletail{}%
+\begin{supertabular}{lp{\glsdescwidth}p{\glspagelistwidth}}}{%
+\end{supertabular}}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}%
+\renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
+\@glstarget{glo:##1}{##2} & ##3 & ##5\\}%
+\renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{ & &\\}}
+\newglossarystyle{super3colborder}{%
+\glossarystyle{super3col}%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+\tablehead{\hline}\tabletail{\hline}%
+\begin{supertabular}{|l|p{\glsdescwidth}|p{\glspagelistwidth}|}}{%
+\end{supertabular}}%
+}
+\newglossarystyle{super3colheader}{%
+\glossarystyle{super3col}%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+\tablehead{\bfseries\entryname&\bfseries\descriptionname&
+\bfseries\pagelistname\\}\tabletail{}%
+\begin{supertabular}{lp{\glsdescwidth}p{\glspagelistwidth}}}{%
+\end{supertabular}}%
+}
+\newglossarystyle{super3colheaderborder}{%
+\glossarystyle{super3colborder}%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+\tablehead{\hline
+\bfseries\entryname&\bfseries\descriptionname&
+\bfseries\pagelistname\\\hline}%
+\tabletail{\hline}%
+\begin{supertabular}{|l|p{\glsdescwidth}|p{\glspagelistwidth}|}}{%
+\end{supertabular}}%
+}
+\newglossarystyle{super4col}{%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+\tablehead{}\tabletail{}%
+\begin{supertabular}{llll}}{%
+\end{supertabular}}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryheader}{}%
+\renewcommand*{\glsgroupheading}[1]{}%
+\renewcommand*{\glossaryentryfield}[5]{%
+\@glstarget{glo:##1}{##2} & ##3 & ##4 & ##5\\}%
+\renewcommand*{\glsgroupskip}{ & & &\\}}
+\newglossarystyle{super4colheader}{%
+\glossarystyle{super4col}%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+\tablehead{\bfseries\entryname&\bfseries\descriptionname&
+\bfseries\symbolname &
+\bfseries\pagelistname\\}\tabletail{}%
+\begin{supertabular}{llll}}{%
+\end{supertabular}}%
+}
+\newglossarystyle{super4colborder}{%
+\glossarystyle{super4col}%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+\tablehead{\hline}\tabletail{\hline}%
+\begin{supertabular}{|l|l|l|l|}}{%
+\end{supertabular}}%
+}
+\newglossarystyle{super4colheaderborder}{%
+\glossarystyle{super4col}%
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+\tablehead{\hline\bfseries\entryname&\bfseries\descriptionname&
+\bfseries\symbolname &
+\bfseries\pagelistname\\}\tabletail{\hline}%
+\begin{supertabular}{|l|l|l|l|}}{%
+\end{supertabular}}%
+}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `glossary-super.sty'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tpm/glossaries.tpm b/Master/texmf-dist/tpm/glossaries.tpm
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3b8b357b5cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tpm/glossaries.tpm
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+<!DOCTYPE rdf:RDF SYSTEM "../../support/tpm.dtd">
+<rdf:RDF xmlns:rdf="http://www.w3.org/1999/02/22-rdf-syntax-ns#" xmlns:TPM="http://texlive.dante.de/">
+  <rdf:Description about="http://texlive.dante.de/texlive/Package/glossaries.zip">
+    <TPM:Name>glossaries</TPM:Name>
+    <TPM:Type>Package</TPM:Type>
+    <TPM:Date>2007/05/16 16:42:48</TPM:Date>
+    <TPM:Version></TPM:Version>
+    <TPM:Creator>karl</TPM:Creator>
+    <TPM:Title>The glossaries package.</TPM:Title>
+    <TPM:Description></TPM:Description>
+    <TPM:Author></TPM:Author>
+    <TPM:Size>631316</TPM:Size>
+    <TPM:License></TPM:License>
+    <TPM:Build/>
+    <TPM:RunFiles size="49940">
+texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossaries.sty
+texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossary-hypernav.sty
+texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossary-list.sty
+texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossary-long.sty
+texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries/glossary-super.sty
+texmf-dist/tpm/glossaries.tpm
+    </TPM:RunFiles>
+    <TPM:DocFiles size="452234">
+texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/README
+texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/database1.tex
+texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/database2.tex
+texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/glossaries.pdf
+texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sample.tex
+texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sample4col.tex
+texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleAcr.tex
+texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleAcrDesc.tex
+texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleDB.tex
+texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleEq.tex
+texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleEqPg.tex
+texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleNtn.tex
+texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/doc/sampleSec.tex
+texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/latex2html/glossaries.perl
+texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/scripts/makeglossaries
+texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries/scripts/makeglossaries.bat
+    </TPM:DocFiles>
+    <TPM:SourceFiles size="131174">
+texmf-dist/source/latex/glossaries/glossaries.dtx
+texmf-dist/source/latex/glossaries/glossaries.ins
+    </TPM:SourceFiles>
+    <TPM:Provides>Package/glossaries</TPM:Provides>
+  </rdf:Description>
+</rdf:RDF>
+